Mercedes-Benz GLE Coupe 2018 Command Manual PDF

1 of 190
1 of 190

Summary of Content for Mercedes-Benz GLE Coupe 2018 Command Manual PDF

COMAND Supplement

Mercedes-Benz Order no. P000 0163 13 Part no. 166 584 87 07 Edition B-2018

1665848707M 1665848707

CO MA

ND Su

pp lem

en t

Publication details Internet

Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehi- cles and about Daimler AG can be found on the following websites: http://www.mbusa.com (USA only) http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only)

Editorial office

You are welcome to forward any queries or sug- gestions youmay have regarding this Operator's Manual to the technical documentation team at the following address: Daimler AG, HPC: CAC, Customer Service, 70546 Stuttgart, Germany Daimler AG: Not to be reprinted, translated or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, with- out written permission from Daimler AG.

Vehicle manufacturer

Daimler AG Mercedesstra e 137 70327 Stuttgart Germany

Symbols In this Operator's Manual you will find the fol- lowing symbols:

G WARNING Warning notes make you aware of dangers which could pose a threat to your health or life, or to the health and life of others.

H Environmental note Environmental notes provide you with infor- mation on environmentally aware actions or disposal.

! Notes on material damage alert you to dan- gers that could lead to damage to your vehi- cle.

i Practical tips or further information that could be helpful to you.

X This symbol indicates an instruction that must be followed.

X Several of these symbols in succession indicate an instruction with several steps.

(Y page)

This symbol tells youwhere you can find more information about a topic.

Display This text indicates a message in the multimedia display.

Parts of the software in the vehicle are protected by copyright 2005 The FreeType Project http://www.freetype.org. All rights reserved.

As at 05.09.2016

Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz First of all, familiarize yourself with your multi- media system. Read these operating instruc- tions, particularly the safety and warning notes, before you drive off. This will help you to obtain the maximum pleas- ure from your multimedia system and avoid endangering yourself and others. The equipment level and functions of your mul- timedia system may differ depending on: RModel ROrder RCountry specification RAvailability Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to introduce changes in the following areas: Rdesign Requipment Rtechnical features The equipment in your vehicle may therefore differ from that shown in the descriptions and illustrations. Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center if you have further questions. The Operator's Manual and all supplements are integral parts of the vehicle. You should always keep it in the vehicle and pass it on to the new owner if you sell the vehicle. The technical documentation team at Daimler AGwishes you safe and pleasantmotor- ing. Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. A Daimler Company

1665848707 1665848707M

Index ....................................................... 4

Introduction ......................................... 14 Operating safety .................................... 14 Data stored in the vehicle ...................... 15 Information on copyright ....................... 17 Your multimedia system equipment ...... 17

Overview and operation ..................... 18 Overview ................................................ 18 Touchpad ............................................... 23 Basic functions ...................................... 28 Character entry (telephony) ................... 29 Character entry (navigation) .................. 30 Favorites ................................................ 32

System settings .................................. 34 Your multimedia system equipment ...... 34 Important safety notes .......................... 34 Display settings ..................................... 34 Time settings ......................................... 35 Text reader settings ............................... 37 Voice Control System settings ............... 37 Wi-Fi ...................................................... 37 Bluetooth settings ............................... 40 Setting the system language ................. 41 Calling up the favorite functions ............ 41 Importing/exporting data ...................... 42 Reset function ....................................... 43

Vehicle functions ................................ 44 Your multimedia system equipment ...... 44 Important safety notes .......................... 44 Vehicle settings ..................................... 44 Seats ..................................................... 46 360 camera ......................................... 47 Rear view camera .................................. 48 DYNAMIC SELECT .................................. 49 Driving dynamics ................................... 51

Navigation ........................................... 52 Your multimedia system equipment ...... 52 Introduction ........................................... 52 Basic settings ........................................ 54

Destination entry ................................... 56 Personal POIs and routes ...................... 67 Route guidance ...................................... 70 Real-time traffic reports ......................... 76 Storing destinations ............................... 80 Map functions ........................................ 82 Navigation functions .............................. 87 Problems with the navigation system .... 88

Telephone ............................................ 90 Your multimedia system equipment ...... 90 Important safety notes .......................... 90 General notes ........................................ 90 Telephone menu overview ..................... 91 Connecting/disconnecting a mobile phone .................................................... 91 Setting the reception and transmis- sion volume ........................................... 95 Using the telephone .............................. 95 Mobile phone voice recognition ............. 99 Phone book ........................................... 99 Address book ...................................... 102 Importing contacts .............................. 107 Call lists ............................................... 109 Speed dial lists .................................... 111 Messages (text messages and e- mails) ................................................... 111 Dictation function ................................ 117 Apple CarPlay ................................... 118 Android Auto ....................................... 120

Online and Internet functions .......... 122 Your multimedia system equipment .... 122 Important safety notes ........................ 122 Conditions for access .......................... 122 Establishing/ending the connection .... 122 Mercedes-Benz Apps ........................... 123 Web browser ....................................... 123

Radio .................................................. 128 Your multimedia system equipment .... 128 Switching on the radio ......................... 128 Overview .............................................. 128 Sets the waveband .............................. 129 Station ................................................. 129 Tagging music tracks ........................... 130

2 Contents

Displaying station information ............. 130 Calling up sound settings .................... 130 Displaying information ......................... 130 Satellite radio ...................................... 131

Media ................................................. 136 Your multimedia system equipment .... 136 Activating media mode ........................ 136 Audio/video mode ............................... 137 Media search ....................................... 143 Bluetooth audio mode ....................... 145 Operation with the Media Interface ..... 149 Video DVD mode ................................. 151 Picture viewer ...................................... 155

Sound ................................................. 157 Your multimedia system equipment .... 157 Sound settings ..................................... 157 Harman/kardon Logic 7 surround sound system ...................................... 157 Bang & Olufsen BeoSound ................... 159

SIRIUS Weather ................................ 161 Your multimedia system equipment .... 161 Weather forecasts ............................... 161

Rear Seat Entertainment System .... 169 Your multimedia system equipment .... 169 Overview .............................................. 169 Basic functions .................................... 173 System settings ................................... 175 Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode ........... 175 Video DVD mode ................................. 179 Active COMAND media source mode .. 182 AUX mode ........................................... 184

Contents 3

1, 2, 3 ... 360 camera

Displaying images ............................ 47 Opening the camera cover for cleaning (COMAND) ......................... 48 Settings ........................................... 48

A Activating media mode

General notes ................................ 136 Adding bookmarks ............................ 124 Address book

Adding a new contact .................... 104 Adding information to a contact .... 104 Automatically importing contacts from the phone .............................. 107 Browsing ........................................ 103 Calling up ....................................... 103 Changing the category of an entry .. 106 Changing the display and sorting criteria for contacts ....................... 106 Deleting contacts ........................... 107 Deleting imported contacts ........... 108 Displaying contact details .............. 104 Editing a contact ............................ 105 Importing contacts ........................ 107 Introduction ................................... 102 Making a call ................................. 105 Receiving vCards ........................... 108 Saving a contact ............................ 107 Searching for a contact ................. 103 Sending e-mails ............................. 105 Sending text messages .................. 105 Starting route guidance ................. 105 Storing a phone number as a speed dial number ......................... 106 Voice tags ...................................... 106

Address entry menu ............................ 56 Adjusting the volume

COMAND ......................................... 28 Traffic announcements .................... 28

Alternative Route ................................ 74 Ambient lighting

Setting (COMAND) ........................... 44 Android Auto

Activating voice control ................. 121

Changing the sound settings ......... 121 Connecting .................................... 120 Ending the connection ................... 121 Transmitted vehicle data ............... 121

Apple CarPlay Activating ....................................... 119 Changing the activation mode ....... 119 Connecting .................................... 119 Ending ............................................ 119 Requirements ................................ 119 Transmitted vehicle data ............... 119

Armrest Adjusting (COMAND) ....................... 46

Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode Switching to (Rear Seat Entertain- ment System) ................................ 176

Audio CD/MP3 mode Switching to ................................... 136

Audio CDs Saving ............................................ 143

Automatic time Switching on/off .............................. 35

AUX jacks CD/DVD drive ............................... 171

Avoiding an area .................................. 85

B Back button ......................................... 22 Bang & Olufsen sound system

Balance/Fader ............................... 160 Calling up the sound menu ............ 159 Equalizer ........................................ 160 Features ........................................ 159 Sound profile ................................. 160 VIP selection .................................. 160

Bluetooth Activating audio mode ................... 146 Activating/deactivating ................... 41 Audio device mode and searching for mobile phones .......................... 149 Authorization using Secure Sim- ple Pairing ........................................ 93 Basic display (audio mode) ............ 146 Connecting a different mobile phone .............................................. 94 Connecting audio devices .............. 146

4 Index

De-authorizing (de-registering) a device ............................................ 149 Device list ...................................... 146 Displaying connection details .......... 95 Displaying details ........................... 147 Entering the passcode ..................... 93 External authorization (audio device) ........................................... 147 Increasing the volume using COMAND ....................................... 148 Interface .......................................... 90 Playback options ........................... 148 Preparation .................................... 145 Reconnecting an audio device ....... 149 Searching for a mobile phone .......... 92 Selecting a playback option ........... 148 Selecting a track ............................ 148 Starting and stopping playback ..... 147 Starting playback if the Blue- tooth audio device has been stopped ......................................... 148 Telephony ........................................ 91 Telephony notes .............................. 90

Buttons and controller ........................ 22

C Call lists

Displaying details ........................... 109 Opening and selecting an entry ..... 109 Saving an entry in the address book .............................................. 110

Camera 360 camera (COMAND) ................. 47 Rear view camera ............................ 48

Car pool lanes ...................................... 56 Category list (music search) ............ 144 CD

Fast forward/fast rewind ............... 142 Inserting ........................................ 139 Inserting/loading (DVD changer) ... 139 Inserting/loading (Rear Seat Entertainment System) .................. 176 Notes on discs ............................... 139 Removing/ejecting (Rear Seat Entertainment System) .................. 176 Selecting a track ............................ 142

CD mode Playback options ........................... 141

Character entry Phone book ...................................... 29

Characters Entering (navigation) ........................ 30

Clear button ......................................... 22 Climate control

Ionization (COMAND) ....................... 45 COMAND

Active multicontour seat .................. 46 Basic functions ................................ 28 Components .................................... 18 Control panel ................................... 21 Controller ......................................... 22 Display ............................................. 19 Functions ......................................... 18 Multicontour seat ............................ 46 Seat functions .................................. 46 Switching on/off .............................. 28

COMAND display Cleaning instructions ....................... 19 Setting ............................................. 34

Contacts Deleting ......................................... 107 Importing ....................................... 107

Controller ............................................. 22 Cordless headphones

Changing batteries ........................ 173 Indicator lamp ................................ 172 Rear Seat Entertainment System ... 171 Selecting the screen ...................... 172

D Date format, setting ............................ 36 Day design, setting ............................. 34 Delayed switch-off

Interior lighting ................................ 45 Delayed switch-off time

Setting (COMAND) ........................... 45 Destination

Saving to an SD card ....................... 80 Storing in the address book ............. 80

Destination (navigation) Entering a destination using the map ................................................. 63 Entering a point of interest .............. 61

Index 5

Entering using geo-coordinates ....... 66 Entering using Mercedes-Benz Apps ................................................ 66 Keyword search ............................... 59 Saving .............................................. 80 Selecting an address book con- tact as a destination ........................ 61 Selecting from the list of last des- tinations ........................................... 60

Dialing a number (telephone) ............. 96 Display

Selecting the design ........................ 34 Switching on/off .............................. 35

Displaying energy consumption and generated electrical energy (COMAND) ............................................ 45 Driving Dynamics

Displaying ........................................ 51 DVD

Inserting/loading (DVD changer) ... 139 Inserting/loading (Rear Seat Entertainment System) .................. 176 Notes on discs ............................... 139 Removing/ejecting (DVD changer) ........................................ 140 Removing/ejecting (Rear Seat Entertainment System) .................. 176

DVD video Rear Seat Entertainment System ... 179

DYNAMIC SELECT Configuration via the DYNAMIC SELECT controller ............................ 49 Configuring individual drive pro- gram ................................................ 49 Configuring using the DYNAMIC SELECT button ................................. 49 Displaying engine data ..................... 49 Setting options ................................ 50

E E-mail

Answering ...................................... 116 Calling up the settings menu ......... 112 Changing the name of the e-mail account .......................................... 113 Configuring an e-mail account ....... 113 Configuring the e-mails displayed .. 112

Deactivating the e-mail function .... 113 Deleting ......................................... 117 Displaying details ........................... 114 Downloading e-mails manually ...... 113 Editing text templates .................... 116 Forwarding ..................................... 116 Inbox .............................................. 114 Reading .......................................... 113 Settings ......................................... 112 Storing the sender as a new entry in the address book ....................... 117 Using a phone number in the text .. 117 Using text templates ...................... 116 Writing ........................................... 115

Entering the address (example) ......... 57 Entering the city .................................. 57

F Factory setting (reset function) ......... 43 Favorites

Adding ............................................. 32 Adding (predefined) ......................... 32 Adding (your own) ............................ 32 Deleting ........................................... 33 Displaying and calling up ................. 32 Moving ............................................. 33 Overview .......................................... 32 Renaming ......................................... 33

Favorites (Internet) ........................... 126 Favorites button .................................. 41 Fuel consumption (COMAND) ............ 45

G GPS reception ...................................... 52 Gracenote Media Database ............ 142

H Handwriting recognition

Switching text reader function on/off .............................................. 25 Touchpad ......................................... 25

Harman kardon Logic 7 sur- round sound system

Balance/Fader ............................... 158 Calling up the sound menu ............ 158 Equalizer ........................................ 158

6 Index

Features ........................................ 157 Surround sound ............................. 159

Heading up (navigation) ..................... 82 Home address

Entering and saving ......................... 58

I Incident (traffic report) ....................... 76 Intermediate destinations

Accepting for the route .................... 66 Creating ........................................... 64 Editing .............................................. 65 Entering ........................................... 64 Searching for a gas station when the fuel level is low .......................... 66

Internet Conditions for access .................... 122 Creating favorites .......................... 126 Entering the URL ............................ 123 Favorites manager ......................... 126 Favorites menu .............................. 127 Menu functions .............................. 124 Options menu ................................ 124

K Keyword search (navigation)

Entering keywords ........................... 59 Online search ................................... 60 Selecting search options ................. 60 Selecting search results ................... 59

L Lane recommendations

Explanation ...................................... 71 Presentation .................................... 71

Lights Activating/deactivating the exte- rior lighting delayed switch-off ......... 45 Setting the ambient lighting (COMAND) ....................................... 44

Locator lighting Setting (COMAND) ........................... 45

Lumbar support Adjusting (COMAND) ....................... 46

M Making a call

Using speed dial .............................. 97 Using the call lists ............................ 96 Using the number keypad ................ 96 Using the phone book ...................... 96

Map Selecting map content ..................... 82

Map (navigation) Adjusting the scale .......................... 82 Building images ................................ 85 Displaying the next intersection ...... 84 Heading ........................................... 82 Map settings .................................... 82 Moving ............................................. 53 North orientation ............................. 82 Notes ............................................... 82 Rotating the 3D map ........................ 84 Selecting POI symbols on the map ................................................. 83 Selecting text information on the map ................................................. 83 Showing the map version ................. 84 Switching highway information on/off .............................................. 84 Traffic Sign Assist ............................ 84 Updating .......................................... 87

Map functions ...................................... 82 Massage

Selecting a program ......................... 47 Media Interface

Basic display .................................. 150 Mode ............................................. 149 Playback options ........................... 151 Search ........................................... 150 Selecting a music file ..................... 150 Supported devices ......................... 150 Supported file formats ................... 150 Switching to Media Interface ......... 150 Video function ............................... 151

Media mode Bluetooth Audio ........................... 145 Connections for external media sources .......................................... 136 Switching on .................................. 136

Media search By folder ........................................ 144

Index 7

Category list .................................. 144 Current track list ............................ 144 General notes ................................ 143 Keyword search ............................. 144 Music genres ................................. 144 Selecting by cover ......................... 144 Starting the media search .............. 143

Menu overview CD audio and MP3 mode ............... 139

Mercedes-Benz Apps Calling up ....................................... 123 Voice-operated control system ...... 123

Microphone, switching on/off ........... 97 Mobile phone

Authorizing ....................................... 93 Connecting (Bluetooth inter- face) ................................................ 91 Connecting another mobile phone .............................................. 94 De-authorizing ................................. 95 Displaying Bluetooth connection details .............................................. 95

MP3 Copyright ....................................... 138 Fast forward/fast rewind ............... 142 Notes ............................................. 137 Safety notes .................................. 137 Stop and playback function ........... 142

N Navigation

Adjusting the volume of the navi- gation announcements .................... 28 Alternative route .............................. 74 Avoiding an area .............................. 85 Basic settings .................................. 54 Blocking a route section affected by a traffic jam ................................. 75 Calling up the compass display ........ 88 Calling up the menu ......................... 87 Entering a destination ...................... 56 Entering a destination using the map ................................................. 63 Entering a point of interest .............. 61 Entering characters (character bar) .................................................. 30 GPS reception .................................. 52

Important safety notes .................... 52 Info on navigation ............................ 88 Lane recommendation ..................... 71 Off-road/Off-map (off-road desti- nation) ............................................. 76 Online map display .......................... 87 Reading out traffic reports ............... 79 Repeating announcements .............. 73 Selecting a destination from the list of last destinations ..................... 60 Setting route options (avoiding: highways, toll roads, tunnels, fer- ries) ................................................. 54 Setting the route type (short route, fast route, dynamic route or economic route) ............................... 54 Showing/hiding the menu ............... 53 Starting route calculation ................ 58 Switching announcements on/off .............................................. 73 Switching to ..................................... 53

Navigation announcements Switching off .................................... 28

North orientation (navigation) ........... 82

O Off-road ................................................ 76 Online and Internet functions

Ending the connection ................... 123 Establishing a connection .............. 122 Mercedes-Benz Apps ..................... 123 Web browser .................................. 123

P Pause function

Video DVD ..................................... 155 Personal POIs and routes

Alert when approaching (personal POI) .................................................. 67 Editing .............................................. 68 Importing via Mercedes-Benz Apps ................................................ 68 Recording the route ......................... 69 Saving .............................................. 67 Selecting .......................................... 68 Settings for personal POIs ............... 67

8 Index

Phone book Adding a new contact .................... 101 Adding information to a contact .... 101 Automatically importing contacts from the mobile phone .................. 102 Calling up ......................................... 99 Deleting a contact ......................... 102 Displaying the details of an entry ... 101 Entering characters ......................... 29 Saving a contact ............................ 102 Searching for a contact ................. 100 Symbol overview ............................ 100

Phone call Dialing .............................................. 96

Picture viewer Changing view ............................... 155 Displaying pictures ........................ 155 Exiting the picture viewer .............. 156

POI (navigation) Category .......................................... 62 Defining the position for the POI search .............................................. 61 Entering ........................................... 61 Selecting .......................................... 63

Previous destinations (navigation) .... 81

R Radio

Activating/deactivating the sta- tion presets display ....................... 129 Deleting a station .......................... 130 Displaying information ................... 130 Displaying station information ....... 130 Displaying the artist and track ....... 130 Moving stations ............................. 130 Overview ........................................ 128 Setting the waveband .................... 129 Sound settings (balance, bass, treble) ............................................ 130 Storing stations ............................. 129 Switching on .................................. 128 Tagging music tracks (download- ing/purchasing tracks from the iTunes Store) ............................... 130

Read-aloud function Automatic ........................................ 79

Read-aloud function for e-mails ....... 114

Reading out Traffic reports on the route .............. 79

Real-time traffic reports ..................... 76 Rear Seat Entertainment System

Active COMAND source ................. 183 Adjusting sound settings ............... 174 Adjusting the brightness ................ 174 Adjusting the color ........................ 174 Adjusting the contrast ................... 174 AUX mode ...................................... 184 CD/DVD audio and MP3 mode ...... 175 Changing the batteries .................. 172 Changing the picture format .......... 175 Control menu ................................. 179 Cordless headphones .................... 171 DVD video mode ............................ 179 Multiple users ................................ 174 Operating with the headphones ..... 173 Picture settings .............................. 174 System settings ............................. 175 Using the main loudspeaker .......... 174

Rear view camera Displaying the image ........................ 48 Opening the camera cover for cleaning (COMAND) ......................... 48 Switching on/off (COMAND) ........... 48

Rear-compartment screens .............. 169 Receiving vCards ............................... 108 Redialing (telephone) .......................... 96 Remote control

Button lighting ............................... 170 Changing batteries ........................ 173 Rear Seat Entertainment System ... 170

Reserve fuel level Switching the function on/off in COMAND ......................................... 55

Resetting (factory settings) ............... 43 Route (navigation)

Selecting an alternative route .......... 74 Setting route options (avoiding: highways, toll roads, tunnels, fer- ries) ................................................. 54 Setting the route type (short route, fast route, dynamic route or economic route) ............................... 54 Starting calculation .......................... 58

Index 9

Route guidance Continue .......................................... 74 Freeway information ........................ 72 General notes .................................. 70 Lane recommendations ................... 71 Off-road ........................................... 76 Traffic reports .................................. 76

S Safety notes

Audio CD and MP3 mode ............... 137 Using the telephone ......................... 90

Satellite radio Displaying information ................... 134 Overview ........................................ 132 Presets menu view ......................... 133 Registering .................................... 131 Switching to ................................... 132

SatRadio Channel list updates ...................... 135 Memory functions .......................... 133 Music and sports alerts ................. 134 Notes ............................................. 131 Selecting a category ...................... 132 Selecting a channel ....................... 132 Tagging music tracks ..................... 134

Screen Selecting for the remote control .... 170

SD card Inserting ........................................ 141 Inserting/removing ........................ 140 Removing ....................................... 141

Seat cushion Adjusting (COMAND) ....................... 46

Seats Active multicontour seat (COMAND) ....................................... 46 Adjusting the lumbar support (COMAND) ....................................... 46 Balance (seat heating) ..................... 47 Massage function (COMAND) .......... 46 Massage programs (COMAND) ........ 46 Resetting settings ............................ 47 Seat functions (COMAND) ............... 46 Selecting for adjustment (COMAND) ....................................... 46

Setting the driving dynamics (COMAND) ....................................... 46

Selecting stations Radio ............................................. 129

Sending DTMF tones ........................... 98 Setting the audio format

Rear Seat Entertainment System ... 181 Setting the language

COMAND ......................................... 41 Rear Seat Entertainment System ... 181

Setting the night design ..................... 34 Setting the text reader speed ............ 37 Setting the volume

Telephone calls ................................ 28 Settings

Sound settings ............................... 157 Short message

see Text messages (SMS) SIRIUS weather display

5-day forecast ................................ 161 Daily forecast ................................. 161 Detail information .......................... 162 Information chart ........................... 161 Selecting a location for the weather forecast ............................ 162 Switching on/off ........................... 161 Weather map ................................. 164

SIRIUS weather map Storm Guide .................................. 168 Storm Watch Box ........................... 168

Sound Switching on/off .............................. 28

Sound settings Balance/fader ............................... 157 Calling up the sound menu ............ 157 Equalizer ........................................ 157

Speed dial Deleting ......................................... 111 Setting up ...................................... 111

State/province Selecting .......................................... 57

Station presets (radio) Deleting marked stations ............... 130

Storing stations Radio ............................................. 129

Switching between summer time and standard time ............................... 35

10 Index

Switching on media mode Using the Media button ................. 136 Via the device list .......................... 137 Via the main function bar ............... 136 Via the number keypad .................. 137

System settings Bluetooth ....................................... 40 Date ................................................. 35 Importing/exporting data ................ 42 Language ......................................... 41 Text reader speed ............................ 37 Time ................................................. 35 Time zone ........................................ 35 Voice Control System ...................... 37

T Telephone

Accepting a call (COMAND) ............. 95 Adding a call .................................... 97 Adjusting the volume for calls .......... 28 Android Auto .................................. 120 Apple CarPlay ............................. 118 Authorizing a mobile phone (con- necting) ............................................ 93 Call lists ......................................... 109 Call waiting ...................................... 98 Calls with several participants ......... 98 Conference calls .............................. 98 Connecting a mobile phone (gen- eral information) .............................. 91 De-authorizing (disconnecting) a mobile phone ................................... 95 Deleting a speed dial preset .......... 111 Deleting messages ........................ 117 Dictation function for text mes- sages and e-mails .......................... 117 Displaying Bluetooth connection details .............................................. 95 Downloading messages manually .. 113 E-mail ............................................. 111 E-mail requirements ....................... 111 E-mail settings ............................... 112 Ending an active call ........................ 99 Entering a number ........................... 96 Entering phone numbers .................. 96 Establishing the connection from the mobile phone ............................. 94

Function restrictions ........................ 91 Functions available during a call ...... 97 General notes .................................. 90 Incoming call during an existing call ................................................... 98 Making a call .................................... 96 Message conditions ....................... 111 Message settings ........................... 112 Operating options ............................ 90 Phone book ...................................... 99 Reading messages ......................... 113 Reception and transmission vol- ume ................................................. 95 Reconnecting a mobile phone automatically ................................... 94 Rejecting a call (COMAND) .............. 96 Safety notes ..................................... 90 Sending DTMF tones ........................ 98 Setting up a speed dial .................. 111 Switching between calls (call wait- ing) .................................................. 98 Switching between mobile phones ............................................. 94 Switching the microphone on/off .... 97 Telephone menu overview ............... 91 Text message conditions ............... 111 Text message settings ................... 112 Text messages (SMS) .................... 111 Toggling ........................................... 98 Using the telephone ......................... 95 Voice recognition ............................. 99 Writing e-mails ............................... 115 Writing text messages ................... 115

Telephone number Entering ........................................... 96

Text messages (SMS) Calling the sender .......................... 117 Calling up the settings menu ......... 112 Configuring the text messages displayed ....................................... 112 Deleting ......................................... 117 Displaying details ........................... 114 Downloading manually ................... 113 Editing text templates .................... 116 Inbox .............................................. 114 Reading .......................................... 113 Reading aloud ................................ 114 Settings ......................................... 112

Index 11

Storing the sender as a new address book entry ........................ 117 Using a phone number in the text .. 117 Using text templates ...................... 116 Writing ........................................... 115

Time Setting the format ............................ 36 Setting the time manually ................ 36 Setting the time zone ....................... 35 Setting the time/date format .......... 36 Switching automatic time on/off ..... 35

Touchpad Calling up quick access for audio .... 24 Changing the audio source .............. 27 Changing the input language for handwriting recognition ................... 27 Changing the station/music track ................................................ 27 Character suggestions ..................... 26 Deleting characters ......................... 26 Entering a space .............................. 26 Entering characters ......................... 26 Gesture control ................................ 23 Handwriting recognition ................... 25 Operating the touchpad ................... 23 Overview .......................................... 23 Quick access for Audio .................... 27 Switching ......................................... 23 Switching input line ......................... 26

Track information .............................. 178 Traffic jam function ............................. 75 Traffic reports

Calling up a list ................................ 77 Real-time traffic report .................... 78

U Updating the digital map .................... 87 USB audio mode

Selecting a track ............................ 142 USB devices

Connecting to the Media Inter- face ............................................... 141

V Vehicle

Data acquisition ............................... 15

Vehicle settings Calling up ......................................... 44

Video see Video DVD

Video DVD Changing the picture format .......... 153 Control option ................................ 152 DVD functions ............................... 154 DVD menu ..................................... 154 DVD's control menu ...................... 153 Full-screen mode ........................... 153 Function restrictions ...................... 152 Notes on discs ............................... 152 Operation ....................................... 151 Overview ........................................ 153 Pause function ............................... 155 Picture settings .............................. 153 Playing conditions .......................... 152 Safety notes .................................. 151 Selecting a scene/chapter ............ 155 Stop function ................................. 155 Switching to ................................... 152 Video menu ................................... 154

Voice Control System Settings ........................................... 37

Volume, adjusting Navigation messages ....................... 28

W Weather map (SIRIUS)

Activating/deactivating display levels ............................................. 165 Calling up ....................................... 164 Legend ........................................... 167 Moving ........................................... 164 Showing/hiding the menu ............. 164 Time stamp .................................... 167

Weather memory (SIRIUS) Selecting an area ........................... 164 Storing an area .............................. 164

Web browser Entering a web address ................. 123

Wi-Fi Changing the SSID name (USA) ....... 39 Connecting the device (Canada) ...... 40 Connecting the device (USA) ........... 38 General notes (Canada) ................... 40

12 Index

General notes (USA) ........................ 38 Generating a new security key (USA) ............................................... 39 Overview (Canada) ........................... 38 Overview (USA) ................................ 37

WiFi Activating (Canada) .......................... 38 Activating (USA) ............................... 38 Connecting a device via WPS PBC (CANADA) ........................................ 40 Connecting a device via WPS PBC (USA) ............................................... 39 Connecting a device via WPS PIN (CANADA) ........................................ 40 Connecting a device via WPS PIN (USA) ............................................... 38 Selecting a hotspot .......................... 40

Index 13

Operating safety

Important safety notes

G WARNING If you operate information systems and com- munication equipment integrated in the vehi- cle when driving, you may be distracted from the traffic situation. You could also lose con- trol of the vehicle. There is a risk of an acci- dent. Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you are not sure that this is possible, park the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions and operate the equip- ment when the vehicle is stationary.

Youmust observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system. The multimedia system calculates the route to the destination without taking account of the following, for example: Rtraffic lights Rstop and yield signs Rmerging lanes Rparking or stopping in a no parking/no stop- ping zone Rother road and traffic rules and regulations Rnarrow bridges The multimedia system may provide incorrect navigation recommendations if the actual street/traffic situation does not correspond with the digital map's data. Digital maps do not cover all areas nor all routes in an area. For example, a route may have been diverted or the direction of a one-way streetmay have changed. For this reason, you must always observe road and traffic rules and regulations during your journey. Road and traffic rules and regulations always have priority over the system's driving recommendations. Navigation announcements are intended to direct you while driving without diverting your attention from the road and driving. Please always use this feature instead of con- sulting the map display for directions. Looking at the icons ormap display can distract you from traffic conditions and driving, and increase the risk of an accident.

Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle covers a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second. This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled equip- ment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that is deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). How- ever, it is recommended to install it at a distance of at least 8 inches (approx. 20 cm) between the radiation source and a person's body (not including limbs such as hands, wrists, feet and legs).

G WARNING Modifications to electronic components, their software as well as wiring can impair their function and/or the function of other net- worked components. In particular, systems relevant to safety could also be affected. As a result, these may no longer function as inten- ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety of the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an accident and injury. Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec- tronic components or their software. You should have all work to electrical and elec- tronic equipment carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Declarations of conformity

Vehicle components which receive and/or transmit radio waves USA only: The wireless devices of this vehicle comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) These devices may not cause interference, and 2) These devices must accept any interference, including interference thatmay cause undesired operation of the device. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli- ance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

14 Introduction

Canada only: The wireless devices of this vehi- cle comply with Industry Canada license- exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) These devices may not cause interference, and 2) These devices must accept any interference, including interference thatmay cause undesired operation of the device.

Correct use You need to observe the following information when using the multimedia system: Rthe safety notes in this manual Rtraffic rules and regulations Rlaws and safety standards pertaining tomotor vehicles

Using roof carriers may impair the correct func- tioning of a roof antenna (phone, satellite radio, GPS). Attaching metalized retrofit film to the wind- shield may affect radio reception. This can have a negative impact on all other antennas (e.g. emergency call antenna) in the vehicle interior. Protection against theft: this device is equip- ped with technical provisions to protect it against theft. Further information on protection against theft can be obtained from an author- ized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Qualified specialist workshop Read the information on qualified specialist workshops in the vehicle Operator's Manual.

Function restrictions For safety reasons, some functions are restric- ted or unavailable while the vehicle is in motion. You will notice this, for example, because either you will not be able to select certain menu items or a message will appear to this effect.

Data stored in the vehicle

Data recording A wide range of electronic components in your vehicle contain data memories. These data memories temporarily or perma- nently store technical information about: Rthe vehicle's operating state Revents Rmalfunctions In general, this technical information docu- ments the state of a component, a module, a system or the surroundings. These include, for example: Roperating conditions of system components, e.g. fluid levels Rthe vehicle's statusmessages and those of its individual components, e.g. number of wheel revolutions/speed, deceleration in move- ment, lateral acceleration, accelerator pedal position Rmalfunctions and defects in important system components, e.g. lights, brakes Rvehicle reactions and operating conditions in special driving situations, e.g. air bag deploy- ment, intervention of stability control sys- tems Rambient conditions, e.g. outside temperature This data is of an exclusively technical nature and can be used to: Rassist in detecting and rectifying faults and defects Ranalyze vehicle functions, e.g. after an acci- dent Roptimize vehicle function The data cannot be used to trace the vehicle's movements. When your vehicle is serviced, technical infor- mation can be read from the event datamemory and fault data memory. Services include, for example: Rrepair services Rservice processes Rwarranty events Rquality assurance The vehicle is read out by employees of the ser- vice network (including the manufacturer) using special diagnostic testers. You can obtain more information there, if required.

Introduction 15

Z

After a malfunction has been rectified, the infor- mation is deleted from the malfunction memory or is continually overwritten. When operating the vehicle, situations are con- ceivable in which this technical data, in connec- tion with other information (if necessary, after consultation with an authorized expert), could be traced to a person. Examples include: Raccident reports Rdamage to the vehicle Rwitness statements Further additional functions that have been con- tractually agreed upon with the customer allow certain vehicle data to be conveyed by the vehi- cle as well. The additional functions include, for example, vehicle location in case of an emer- gency.

COMAND/mbrace If the vehicle is equipped with COMAND or mbrace, additional data about the vehicles operation, the use of the vehicle in certain sit- uations, and the location of the vehicle may be compiled through COMAND or the mbrace sys- tem. For additional information please refer to the COMAND User Manual and/or the mbrace Terms and Conditions.

Event data recorders This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record data that will assist in understanding how a vehicles systems performed in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as dur- ing air bag deployment or when hitting a road obstacle. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: Rhow various systems in your vehicle are oper- ating Rwhether or not the driver and passenger seat belts are fastened

Rhow far (if at all) the driver is depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal and Rhow fast the vehicle is traveling This data can help provide a better understand- ing of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, can combine the EDR data with the type of personal identification data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip- ment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties that have the spe- cial equipment, such as law enforcement, can read the information by accessing the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data may be used in civil and criminal mat- ters as a tool in accident reconstruction, acci- dent claims, and vehicle safety. Since the Crash Data Retrieval CDR tool that is used to extract data from the EDR is commercially available, Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC ("MBUSA") expressly disclaims any and all liability arising from the extraction of this information by unauthorized Mercedes-Benz personnel. MBUSA will not share EDR data with others without the consent of the vehicle owners or, if the vehicle is leased, without the consent of the lessee. Exceptions to this representation include responses to subpoenas by law enforce- ment; by federal, state or local government; in connectionwith or arising out of litigation involv- ing MBUSA or its subsidiaries and affiliates; or, as required by law. Warning: The EDR is a component of the Sup- plemental Restraint System ("SRS") Module. Tampering with, altering, modifying or removing the EDR component may result in a malfunction of the SRS Module and other systems. State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that conflict with federal regulation are pre-empted. Thismeans that in the event of such conflict, the federal regulation governs. As of February 2013, 13 states have enacted laws relating to EDRs.

16 Introduction

Information on copyright

Information on licenses for free and Open Source software used in your vehicle and in the electronic components can be found on this website: http://www.mercedes-benz.com/ opensource.

Your multimedia system equipment

These operating instructions describe all the standard and optional equipment of your multi- media system, as available at the time of going to press. Country-specific differences are pos- sible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not feature all functions described here. This also applies to safety-relevant systems and func- tions. Read the information on qualified specialist workshops in the vehicle Operator's Manual.

Introduction 17

Z

Overview

Components

: Display (Y page 19) ; Control panel (Y page 21) = Controller and buttons (Y page 22) The multimedia system consists of: Rthe display Rthe control panel with a single drive or DVD changer Rthe control panel with a single drive Rthe controller and buttons Rthe touchpad Rtwo connection options for USB devices or via Media Interface in the center console An iPod is connected via a USB cable.

Functions RHD FM radio and HD AM radio/satellite radio RMedia

- Media support: audio CD, MP3 CD, DVD video, two connection options for USB or via Media Interface, SD card, Bluetooth audio An iPod, for example, can be connected directly to the USB via the integratedMedia Interface.

- Media search RSound system

You can select from two sound systems: - Harman Kardon Logic7 surround sound system

- Bang & Olufsen BeoSound AMG sound sys- tem

RNavigation system - Navigation via the hard drive - Destination entry, for example using key- word search

- Realistic 3D map with textured city models - Personal POIs and routes using SDmemory card

- Dynamic route guidancewith traffic reports via SIRIUS satellite radio

- Additional navigation system functions, e.g. compass display

18 Overview Ov

er vi ew

an d op er at io n

RCommunication - Address book - Messaging functions (text messages, e- mail)

- Dictation function - Apple CarPlay - Android Auto - Internet browser - Mercedes-Benz Apps with functions, such as online search, destination and route download, Facebook, stock prices, and news

- Mercedes-Benz Mobile Website - Wi-Fi interface for the connection of a smartphone to the multimedia system

- Wi-Fi hotspot functionality to connect a tablet PC or laptop in order to enable access to the Internet using the customer's mobile phone

RSIRIUS Weather - Weather data as an information chart (cur- rent forecast, 5-day preview, detailed infor- mation)

- Weather data on the weather map, e.g. rain radar data, storm characteristics and the track of tropical cyclones (hurricanes, tor- nadoes)

RVehicle functions - Vehicle settings, e.g. fuel consumption - Ionization - 360 camera - Rear view camera - Seat functions - DYNAMIC SELECT (individual drive pro- gram)

- Driving dynamics display in the multimedia system for vehicles with the Off-Road Engi- neering package (see the vehicle Opera- tor's Manual)

RFavorites button - Fast access to favorites functions using the favorites button on the controller

Display

General notes ! Do not use the space in front of the display for storage. Objects placed here could dam- age the display or impair its function. Avoid any direct contact with the display surface. Pressure on the display surface may result in impairments to the display, which could be irreversible.

Wearing polarized sunglasses may impair your ability to read the display. The display has an automatic temperature-con- trolled switch-off feature. The brightness is automatically reduced if the temperature is too high. The display may then temporarily switch off completely.

Overview

In the status bar at the top you will see the time and other displays, depending on the settings. Below it you will see the main display field. The climate control status display is briefly dis- played when you operate the climate control system. The example shows media playback in SD card mode.

Cleaning instructions ! Do not touch the display. The display has a very sensitive high-gloss surface; there is a risk of scratching. If you have to clean the screen, however, use a mild cleaning agent and a soft, lint-free cloth.

The display must be switched off and have cooled down before you start cleaning. Clean the display screen, when necessary, with a com- mercially availablemicrofiber cloth and cleaning agent for TFT and LCD displays. Do not apply

Overview 19

Ov er vi ew

an d op er at io n

pressure to the display surface when cleaning it, as this could cause irreversible damage to the display. Then, dry the surface with a dry micro- fiber cloth.

Avoid using alcoholic thinners, gasoline or abra- sive cleaning agents. These could damage the display surface.

20 Overview Ov

er vi ew

an d op er at io n

Control panel

Function Page

: Switches to radio mode 128 Sets the waveband 129

; Switches to the last selected media mode 136 Calls up the Media menu 136

= Inserts/removes a CD/DVD into/from the single drive 139 Inserts a CD/DVD into the DVD changer 139 Removes a CD/DVD from the DVD changer 140

? Selects the previous station from the station list 129 Skips back to a track 142 Rewinds 142

A Inserts/removes a CD/DVD 8 Single drive 139 V DVD changer 139

B Clear button 22 Deletes characters Deletes an entry

C Selects the next station from the station list 129 Skips forwards to a track 142 Fast forward 142

Function Page

D Number pad Saves a station 129 Authorizes (connects) a mobile phone 93 Telephone number entry 96 Searches for a contact 100 Character entry 30 z Displays the current track being played (if the data medium supports track infor- mation) 137 g Selects stations by entering the frequency man- ually 129 g Selects a track 142

E Switches themultimedia sys- tem on/off 28 Adjusts the volume 28

F Inserts/removes the SD card 140

G Accepts a call 95 Makes a call 96 Redial number 96 Accepts a new call when a call is being made (call wait- ing) 98

H Rejects a call 96 Ends an active call 99

Overview 21

Ov er vi ew

an d op er at io n

Function Page

I Switches the mute function on/off 28 Switches off navigation announcements 28

J Switches to navigation mode 53 Calls up the navigation sys- tem menu 87

Function Page

K Calls up the telephone menu 91

L Calls up vehicle settings 44

Buttons and controller

Overview

: Clear button ; Switches off the display = Favorites button ? Back button A Controller The controller may be equipped as follows: Rwith theT button instead of button; for the seat settings Rwith a further favorites button instead of but- ton; Ras a 2 button controller with back button? and favorites button= in combination with a touchpad Ras a 2 button controller with back button? and favorites button=

For Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the controller is equipped with back button? and clear but- ton:.

Controller The controller in the center console lets you: Rselect menu items on the display Renter characters

Rselect a destination on the map Rsave entries The controller can be: Rturned3 Rslid left or right1 Rslid forwards or back4 Rslid diagonally2 Rpressed briefly or pressed and held7

Back button You can use the% button to exit amenu or to call up the main menu of the current operating mode. X To exit the menu: briefly press the% button. The multimedia system changes to the next higher menu level in the current operating mode.

X To call up the main menu: press the% button for longer than two seconds. The multimedia system changes to the main menu of the current operating mode.

Clear button The clear button is on the control panel and on the controller. X To delete individual characters: briefly press the$ button on the control panel.

or X Briefly press the j clear button on the controller.

X To delete an entire entry: press and hold the $ button on the control panel.

or X Press and hold the j clear button on the controller.

22 Overview Ov

er vi ew

an d op er at io n

Favorites button You can assign predefined functions using the g favorites button and call them up by press- ing the button (Y page 41).

Display off button

You can switch off the display using the button.

Seat button If the controller is equipped with theT but- ton, you can call up the menu for the seat set- tings (Y page 46).

Touchpad

Touchpad overview ! Do not use any sharp objects on the touch- pad. This could damage the touchpad.

: Touch-sensitive surface ; Favorites button = Calling up quick access for audio ? Back button Using the touchpad, you can: Rselect menu items in the display (Y page 23). Renter characters (handwriting recognition) (Y page 25). Rcontrol the active audio source (Y page 27). Rcreate, manage and call up favorites (Y page 32). Renter destinations in navigation Rsave entries Further information on operating the touchpad (Y page 23).

Do not press your fingers too hard on the touch- pad. This could cause malfunctions.

Switching the touchpad on/off X Press the button. The vehicle menu is displayed.

X To select System Settings: slide6, turn and press the controller. A menu appears.

X Select Touchpad if the touchpad is equipped with handwriting recognition.

X Select Activate Touchpad. The touchpad is switched on O or off .

Operating the touchpad

Selecting a menu item

X Use one finger to touch the touch-sensitive surface.

X Swipe your finger up, down, to the left or right. The selection in the display moves in accord- ance with the direction of movement.

You can navigate in lists or menus in this way.

Confirming a selection

Touchpad 23

Ov er vi ew

an d op er at io n

X Use one finger to press the touch-sensitive surface until you reach the pressure point. Amenu, an option or an application is started.

Calling up quick access for audio

X Use two fingers to touch the lower part of the touch-sensitive surface.

X Swipe your fingers up. Quick access is displayed.

Further information on quick access for audio (Y page 27).

Hiding quick access for audio

X Use two fingers to touch the touch-sensitive surface.

X Swipe your fingers down. Quick access is hidden.

Operating the control for vehicle and sound settings

X Touch the touch-sensitive surface with two fingers, spaced slightly apart.

X Turn both fingers clockwise. The control setting is increased.

or X Turn both fingers counter-clockwise. The control setting is decreased.

Moving the map

X Use one finger to press the touch-sensitive surface until you reach the pressure point. The crosshair is shown.

24 Touchpad Ov

er vi ew

an d op er at io n

X Touch the touch-sensitive surface again with one finger.

X Swipe your finger in any direction. The map is moved is the direction of move- ment.

Zooming in on the map

X Touch the touch-sensitive surface with two fingers, spaced slightly apart.

X Glide your fingers away from each other. The map scale is magnified.

Zooming out of the map

X Touch the touch-sensitive surface with two fingers, spaced far apart.

X Glide your fingers towards each other. The map scale is reduced.

Handwriting recognition

Handwriting recognition overview This function is only available if the touchpad is equipped with handwriting recognition. You can use handwriting recognition for text, numbers or characters in any input line.

: Active input line ; To insert a space (Y page 26) = Illustration of the touch-sensitive surface ? To delete characters (Y page 26) If the character that you have entered can be interpreted in different ways, these options are displayed. More information on the character suggestions (Y page 26). You can also switch the text reader function of the handwriting recognition on and off (Y page 25).

: To exit the menu ; To return to handwriting recognition = To use the phone book or text templates ? To change the input line or the position of

the cursor A To change the input language B To finish character entry X To display the menu: press the touchpad.

Switching the text reader function of the handwriting recognition on/off You can switch the text reader function of the handwriting recognition on or off.

Touchpad 25

Ov er vi ew

an d op er at io n

X Press the button. The vehicle menu is displayed.

X To select System Settings: slide6, turn and press the controller. A menu appears.

X To select Touchpad: turn and press the con- troller.

X Select Read Out Handwriting Recognition. The text reader function is switched on O or off .

Entering characters Requirement: an input line for text, numbers or characters has been selected. X Use one finger to draw the desired character on the touch-sensitive surface. The character recognized is entered in the input line. You can draw the next character on the touch-sensitive surface.

If the character can be interpreted in different ways, these options are displayed. More information on the character suggestions (Y page 26).

Character suggestions

: Character recognized ; Character suggestions X To select a character suggestion: turn the controller. The selected character is entered instead of the automatically recognized character. Char- acter entry can be continued.

Inserts a space Requirement: an input line for text, numbers or characters has been selected.

X Use your finger to touch the touch-sensitive surface and swipe to the right. A space is entered into the input line.

Deletes characters Requirement: an input line for text, numbers or characters has been selected. X Use your finger to touch the touch-sensitive surface and swipe to the left. The character last entered is deleted.

Switching input lines

X Press the touchpad. A symbol is shown.

X To selectp: glide your finger to the left or right and press.

X To select the input line: swipe up or down and press. The selected input line is active and character entry can be continued.

Moving the cursor within the input line

26 Touchpad Ov

er vi ew

an d op er at io n

X Press the touchpad. A symbol is shown.

X To selectp: glide your finger to the left or right and press.

X To move the cursor: glide to the left or right.

Changing the input language for hand- writing recognition Requirement: an input line for text, numbers or characters has been selected. X Press the touchpad. A symbol is shown.

X To selectB: swipe your finger to the left or right and press. The list of available input languages appears.

X To select a language: swipe up or down and press. The input language for handwriting recogni- tion has been changed.

Searching in lists The phone book search is used as an example. You determine the first letter of the contact you are looking for with the first character you enter. X Draw the letter on the touchpad surface. The first contact with the selected first char- acter is highlighted in the phone book. Further information on handwriting recogni- tion on the touchpad (Y page 25).

X Draw additional letters on the touchpad sur- face one after another.

X To complete the search and return to the phone book: press the touchpad.

Selecting the touchpad or controller for character entry Requirement: an input line for text, numbers or characters has been selected. X To switch to character entry on the touch- pad: press the touchpad with your finger. Handwriting recognition on the touchpad is active.

X To switch to character entry with the con- troller: press the controller. Character entry with the controller is active.

Quick access for audio

Changing the station or music track

Depending on the audio source that is currently activated, you can use this function to select the next station or music track. X Call up quick access (Y page 24). The current audio source is displayed.

X To select the previous or next station ormusic track: swipe to the left or right. The selected station or music track is played.

Changing the audio source

X Call up quick access (Y page 24). The current audio source is displayed.

X To display the available audio sources: glide down with one finger.

X To select an audio source: glide your finger to the left or right and press. The selected audio source is played.

Touchpad 27

Ov er vi ew

an d op er at io n

Basic functions

Switching themultimedia systemon/ off X Press the q control knob. When you switch themultimedia system on, a warning message will appear. The multimedia system calls up the previously selectedmenu. If you switch the multimedia system off, play- back of the current media source will also be switched off.

Adjusting the volume

Adjusting the volume formedia sources X Turn the q control knob. or X Press theW orX button on the multi- function steering wheel. The volume of the media source currently selected changes.

Adjusting the volume for traffic announcements and navigation announcements During traffic or navigation announcements: X Turn the q control knob. or X Press theW orX button on the multi- function steering wheel.

i You can set the volume for navigation announcements to be different from the vol- ume of the respective media source.

Adjusting the volume for phone calls You can adjust the volume for hands-free mode during a telephone call. X Turn the q control knob. or X Press theW orX button on the multi- function steering wheel.

i Setting the volume for the Voice Control System voice output; see the separate oper- ating instructions.

Switching the sound on or off

Media source sound X Press the8 button on the control panel or on the multifunction steering wheel. The sound is switched off. If the audio output is switched off, the status line will show the 8 symbol. If you switch the media source or change the volume, the sound is automat- ically switched on.

i Even if the sound is switched off, youwill still hear navigation system announcements.

Switching navigation announcements off and on again X To switch navigation announcements off: press the8 button during an announce- ment. The Spoken driving recommendationshave been deactivated. message appears.

X To switch navigation announcements on again: switch the multimedia system off and then on again (Y page 28).

or X Start a new route calculation (Y page 58). or X Select+: while route guidance is active, show the menu and press the controller (Y page 73).

Function menu

X Press the button or the , $, %, or button. Navigation: the map displays the current vehicle position.

28 Basic functions Ov

er vi ew

an d op er at io n

Radio: the display of the radio mode last set appears. Media: the display for the media source last set appears. In the example, Media Interface mode is set. Telephone/Internet: the display of the last communication function set appears (tele- phone, address book, Internet). Vehicle: the display appears.

X To show themenu: slide4 the controller. The menu for the selected functions appears. Depending on the operation, the marking is shown: Rin the main function bar at the top or Rbelow in the menu bar

X To select a menu item: turn and press the controller. If you have selected a menu item from the main function bar, switch to the last menu set for the selected function. The menu bar features options within the cur- rently set function.

Selecting the operating mode for a main function For the main functions, e.g. communication or media, you can choose from the available oper- ating modes. In the communication menu, you can: Rswitch to telephone mode Rcall up the address book Rcall up the Internet Rcall up the Digital Operator's Manual forTel/ X Press the % button. The phone menu appears.

X To call up the menu: press the % button again.

or X To select Tel/: slide5 and press the controller. The communication menu appears. Phone is at the front.

X To select a menu option: turn and press the controller.

Character entry (telephony)

Entering characters using the charac- ter bar

In the example, a new entry is added to the phone book (Y page 101). The new entry has three input lines for entering the last name, first name and phone number. The input line for the surname is selected automatically. Entering characters X Turn and press the controller. The character selected in character bar; is entered into surname input line:.

X Enter the complete last name. Deleting individual characters X To switch to the bottom line of the character bar: slide6 the controller.

X To selectF: turn and press the controller. The character last entered is deleted.

Deleting an entire entry X To switch to the bottom line of the character bar: slide6 the controller.

X To selectF: turn and hold the controller until the entire entry has been deleted.

Switching input lines X To switch to the bottom line of the character bar: slide6 the controller.

X To select5: turn and press the controller. The input line for the first name is selected. You can enter the characters for the first name.

Character entry (telephony) 29

Ov er vi ew

an d op er at io n

When the telephone number input line is selec- ted, the character bar is adapted for entering digits. Entering characters X Turn and press the controller. The character selected in character bar? is entered into telephone number input line=.

Finishing an entry and saving a contact X To select : turn and press the controller. Further functions available in the character bar

Symbol Function

Switches the character bar for entering characters, digits and symbols

* Switches the character bar to upper-case or lower-case letters

B Changes the country setting for the character bar

F Deletes a character or an entry

4,5 Selects the input line

2,3 Moves the cursor within the input line

b Confirms an entry

% Cancels input

S Inserts a line break (when writing text messages)

Entering characters using the number keypad If an input line for text or numbers is selected, the number keypad is used for the character entry. X For example, to enter the letter c: press the l number key briefly three times in suc- cession. An additional display area is shown with all the available characters. Press the key repeatedly to go through the characters untilc is highlighted.

X Wait until the character display goes out. The letter c is entered in the input line.

Character entry (navigation)

Entering characters using the charac- ter bar

: Characters NEW (orange color) entered by the user

; Characters automatically added by the mul- timedia system YORK

= Characters not currently available ? Currently selected character A Characters currently available B Character bar The example shows the address entry (Y page 57). X To enter a character: turn, slide6 or5 and press the controller. Selected character: is entered in the upper line. The multimedia system adds the missing characters and shows the entry that best matches the current input. The characters are availableA or not=, depending on the characters already entered and the data stored in the digital map.

30 Character entry (navigation) Ov

er vi ew

an d op er at io n

TheG symbol indicates that an entry exists more than once.

X To delete a character: slide6 and turn the controller, then press it after selectingF.

X To delete an entire entry: slide6 and turn the controller; then after selectingF press and hold down the controller until the entire entry is deleted.

X To confirm an entry: slide6 and turn the controller, then press it after selecting.

or X Slide5 the controller repeatedly until the character bar disappears. The location selection list appears. The selec- ted entry is highlighted.

The example shows the character entry when you save a destination as a navigable contact in the address book (Y page 58). The cursor is located in the input line. X To select an input line: slide6 and turn the controller, then press it after selecting4 or5.

or X Slide5 the controller repeatedly until the character bar disappears.

X To move the cursor: select the input line. X Turn and press the controller. or X Slide6 and turn the controller, then press it after selecting2 or3.

X To change the character bar language: slide6 and turn the controller, then press it after selectingB. A menu appears.

X Turn and press the controller. The character set for the selected language is set.

The character bar entry functions are listed in the table.

Symbol Function

Switches between digits and sym- bols

* Switches the character bar from uppercase to lowercase letters

B Changes the character bar lan- guage

F Deletes a character or an entry

Switches to keyword search (Y page 59)

4,5 Selects the input line

2,3 Moves the cursor within the input line

Confirms an entry

& Cancels input

Entering characters using the number keypad X Press one of the number keypad buttons, e.g. l, once or repeatedly in quick succession. The character appears at the bottom of the display when the key is pressed. The first available letter is highlighted.

Character entry (navigation) 31

Ov er vi ew

an d op er at io n

You see which characters you can enter with that key. Each time the key is pressed, the next character is selected.

X Wait until the character display goes out. The entries matching your input are shown in the list.

Favorites

Overview of favorites

: Assigns new favorites (Y page 32) ; Renames a selected favorite (Y page 33) = Moves a selected favorite (Y page 33) ? Deletes a selected favorite (Y page 33) X To display the favorites overview: press the favorites button on the controller. The favorites are displayed.

X To show the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

You can manage a total of 20 favorites. Further information on how to select and display a favorite (Y page 32).

Displaying and selecting favorites X Press the favorites button on the controller. The favorites are displayed.

X To call up a favorite: turn and press the con- troller.

Adding favorites

Adding predefined favorites X Press the favorites button on the controller. The favorites are displayed.

X To show the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select Reassign: turn and press the con- troller. The categories for the available favorites are displayed.

X To select a category: turn and press the controller. The corresponding favorites are displayed.

X To select a favorite: turn and press the con- troller.

X To add a favorite at the desired position: turn and press the controller. If there is already a favorite at this position, then this will be deleted.

Adding your own favorites You can create your own favorites to help you to use these functions, for example: RCalling up telephone numbers from the tele- phone book RSelecting a radio station RSkipping to a specific place in a track or an audio book RCalling up favored media RSelecting navigation destinations for route calculation

The example describes how to add a contact's telephone number as a favorite. X Call up the phone book (Y page 99). X Select the contact. X To add a telephone number as a favorite at the desired position: press and hold the favorites button on the controller until the favorites are displayed.

X Turn and press the controller. If there is already a favorite at this position, it will be deleted and replaced by a new one.

32 Favorites Ov

er vi ew

an d op er at io n

Renaming favorites X Press the favorites button on the controller. The favorites are displayed.

X To select a favorite to be renamed: turn the controller.

X To show the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select Rename , turn and press the con- troller.

X Enter characters using the controller. X To finish the entry: select OK . The favorite is renamed.

Moving favorites

X Press the favorites button on the controller. The favorites are displayed.

X To select the favorite to bemoved: turn the controller.

X To show the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select Move , turn and press the controller. X To store the favorite in the desired posi- tion: turn and press the controller. If there is already a favorite at this position, then this will be deleted.

Deleting favorites X Press the favorites button on the controller. The favorites are displayed.

X To select the favorite to be deleted: turn the controller.

X To show the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select Delete: turn and press the control- ler.

X To select Yes or No : turn and press the con- troller. If you select Yes the favorite is deleted. No cancels the procedure.

Favorites 33

Ov er vi ew

an d op er at io n

Your multimedia system equipment

These operating instructions describe all the standard and optional equipment of your multi- media system, as available at the time of going to press. Country-specific differences are pos- sible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not feature all functions described here. This also applies to safety-relevant systems and func- tions. Read the information on qualified specialist workshops in the vehicle Operator's Manual.

Important safety notes

G WARNING If you operate mobile communication equip- ment when driving, you may be distracted from the traffic situation. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate this equipment when the vehicle is stationary.

G WARNING SD cards are small parts. They can be swal- lowed and cause choking. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Keep the SD card out of the reach of children. If a SD card is swallowed, seek medical atten- tion immediately.

Youmust observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operatingmobile communications equipment in the vehicle.

Display settings

Setting the brightness The brightness detected by the display light sen- sor affects the setting options for this function.

X Press the button. or X Press Vehicle in the main function bar. The vehicle menu is displayed.

X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select System Settings: turn and press the controller. A menu appears.

X To select Display: turn and press the con- troller. A menu appears.

X Select Brightness . A control appears.

X To select the desired brightness: turn and press the controller.

Display design The display features optimized designs for day- time and night-time operation. You can set the design bymanually selecting day or night design or opt for an automatic setting. X Press the button. or X Press Vehicle in the main function bar. The vehicle menu is displayed.

X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select System Settings: turn and press the controller. A menu appears.

X To select Display : turn and press the con- troller. A menu appears.

X To select Day Mode, Night Mode or Auto : turn and press the controller. The # dot indicates the current setting.

34 Display settings Sy st em

se tt in gs

Design Explanation

Day Mode The display is set perma- nently to day design.

Night Mode The display is set perma- nently to night design.

Auto The multimedia system evaluates the data of the light sensor and automat- ically switches over the display design.

Switching the display on/off Switching off the display X Press the button. X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select Display Off: turn and press the controller. The display goes out.

X To switch the display on again: press the controller.

Time settings

General information The multimedia system can automatically set the time and date. The following navigation system functions require the time, time zone and summer/stand- ard time to be set correctly in order to work properly: Rroute guidance on routes with time-depend- ent traffic guidance Rcalculation of expected time of arrival

Switching automatic time on and off The Automatic Time Settings function is used to activate or deactivate the automatic setting of the time and date. This function is activated when the vehicle leaves the factory. X Press the button. or X Press Vehicle in the main function bar. The vehicle menu is displayed.

X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select Time : turn and press the controller. A menu appears.

X To switch Automatic Time Settings on O or off : press the controller.

Setting the time zone To set the time zone, the Automatic TimeSettings function must be activated. X Press the button. or X Press Vehicle in the main function bar. The vehicle menu is displayed.

X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select Time : turn and press the controller. A menu appears.

X To select Time Zone: : turn and press the controller. A list of countries appears. The # dot indi- cates the current setting.

X To select the country in which you are currently driving: turn and press the con- troller. The country is accepted. A time zone list may also be displayed, depending on the country selected.

X To select the desired time zone: turn and press the controller. The time zone is accepted. A list of available options for setting summer time appears (Y page 35).

Setting summer and standard time The Daylight Saving Time function is not available in all countries. Using the Daylight Saving Time function, you can set the automatic changeover to sum- mer time or switch the summer time settings on and off. The changeover to summer time advan- ces the time by one hour. X Press the button. or X Press Vehicle in the main function bar. The vehicle menu is displayed.

Time settings 35

Sy st em

se tt in gs

Z

X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select Time : turn and press the controller. A menu appears.

X To select Daylight Saving Time : turn and press the controller. A list with options appears.

X To select Automatic, On or Off: turn and press the controller.

Setting Function

Automatic The summer and standard time are automatically changed over.

On The clock is advanced one hour ahead of standard time.

Off The standard time for the chosen time zone is selected.

Setting the time manually

i Using the manual time settings, you can set the time forward or back by up to several hours.

X Press the button. or X Press Vehicle in the main function bar. The vehicle menu is displayed.

X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select Time : turn and press the controller. A menu appears.

X To select Set Time Manually: turn and press the controller. An analog clock appears.

X To set the hour: turn the controller. X To highlight the minutes: slide9 the controller.

X To set the minutes: turn and press the con- troller. The time is accepted. The Automatic Time Settings function is deactivated . If Automatic is set for the summer time changeover, you will see a prompt asking whether the automatic changeover should be maintained between summer and winter time.

i If Automatic Time Settings is reactiva- ted, the previous settings for time zone and summer time changeover are restored.

Setting the time and date format Use this function to set the time and date format for all displays in the vehicle. X Press the button. or X Press Vehicle in the main function bar. The vehicle menu is displayed.

X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select Time : turn and press the controller. A menu appears.

X To select Format : turn and press the con- troller.

X To select the desired date format: turn and press the controller. The # dot indicates the current setting.

X To select the desired time format: turn and press the controller. The # dot indicates the current setting.

Abbreviation Meaning

DD.MM.YYYY Day.Month.Year date format, year (all four digits)

DD/MM/YYYY Day/Month/Year date format, year (all four digits)

YYYY/MM/DD Year/Month/Day date format, year (all four digits)

36 Time settings Sy st em

se tt in gs

Abbreviation Meaning

YYYY-MM-DD Year - Month - Day date format, year (all four digits)

YY/MM/DD Year/Month/Day date format, year (two digits)

MM/DD/YYYY Month/Day/Year date format, year (all four digits)

HH:MM (24 hrs) Hours : Minutes (24 hour time format)

HH:MM (AM/PM) Hours : Minutes (AM/PM time format)

Text reader settings

X Press the button on the control panel. or X Press Vehicle in the main function bar. The vehicle menu is displayed.

X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select System Settings: turn and press the controller. A menu appears.

X To select Text Reader Speed: turn and press the controller. A list appears.

X Select Fast, Medium or Slow. The # dot indicates the current setting.

Voice Control System settings

Opening/closing the help window i If the set system language is not supported by the Voice Control System, English will be selected.

The help window also shows you information on audible instructions: Rduring individualization Rduring subsequent operation of the Voice Control System

X Press the button. X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select System Settings: turn and press the controller. A menu appears.

X To select Voice Control: turn and press the controller.

X To activate O or deactivate Help Window: press the controller. Further information on the Voice Control Sys- tem; see the separate operating instructions.

Individualization Using individualization, you can fine-tune the Voice Control System to your own voice. This will help improve voice recognition; see the sep- arate operating instructions.

Wi-Fi

Overview (USA) Establishing a Wi-Fi connection between the multimedia system and a Wi-Fi-enabled device, such as a tablet computer or smartphone, requires the following: RWi-Fi must be activated on the multimedia system and on the device to be connected.

If the multimedia system is to be used as a Wi-Fi hotspot: RThemultimedia systemmust be connected to an Internet-enabled mobile phone via Blue- tooth or USB. RThe Internet access data for themobile phone network provider is selected or set in themul- timedia system. RAn Internet connection must be established on the multimedia system.

Wi-Fi 37

Sy st em

se tt in gs

Z

Overview (Canada) The following requirements for establishing a Wi-Fi connection between the multimedia sys- tem and a Wi-Fi hotspot of a Wi-Fi-enabled device, such as a smartphone, or another hot- spot must be met: RWi-Fi must be enabled on the multimedia sys- tem. RSwitch on Wi-Fi hotspot on the external device; see the manufacturer's operating instructions.

Activating Wi-Fi (USA)

X Press the button. or X Press Vehicle in the main function bar. The vehicle menu is displayed.

X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select System Settings: press the con- troller.

X To select WiFi: turn and press the controller. The Wi-Fi menu appears.

X To select OActivate: press the controller.

Activating Wi-Fi (Canada)

X Press the button. or X Press Vehicle in the main function bar. The vehicle menu is displayed.

X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select System Settings: press the con- troller.

X To select WiFi: turn and press the controller. The Wi-Fi menu appears.

X To switch Activate on O: press the con- troller. Available Wi-Fi hotspots are searched for and displayed.

Connecting the device (USA)

General notes The exact Wi-Fi connection procedure may vary depending on the device to be connected. Fol- low the instructions that are shown in the dis- play. Further information; see the manufactur- er's operating instructions.

Connecting a device via WPS PIN (USA) Requirement: for this type of connection, the device to be connected must support "Connect using WPS PIN". X Select Connect via WPS PIN. X Select the vehicle from the device to be con- nected and "Connect using WPS PIN". The vehicle is displayed with the SSID MB Hotspot XXXXX. The device to be connected generates a PIN.

38 Wi-Fi Sy st em

se tt in gs

X Also enter this PIN into the multimedia sys- tem.

X To confirm the entry: press the controller.

Connecting a device via WPS PBC (USA) Requirement: for this type of connection, the device to be connected must support "Connect via push button". X Press the button. or X Press Vehicle in the main function bar. The vehicle menu is displayed.

X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X Select System Settings. X Select WiFi. The Wi-Fi menu appears.

X Select Connect via WPS PBC. X Select the vehicle from the device to be con- nected and Connect via WPS PBC. The vehi- cle is displayed with the SSID MB HotspotXXXXX.

X To confirm the entry: press the controller.

Generating a new security key (USA)

X Press the button. or X Press Vehicle in the main function bar. The vehicle menu is displayed.

X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X Select System Settings. X To select WiFi: turn and press the controller. The Wi-Fi menu appears.

X To select Generate Security Key: turn and press the controller.

X To select Regenerate: press the controller. A new security key is generated.

X To save the security key: turn the controller and select Save. TheWi-Fimenu appears. The new security key will now be displayed and verified when a connection is established via the security key. The connection must be re-established with the newly created security key.

i Device connections established using the previous security key will no longer work after the security key is changed. You have to reconnect these devices (Y page 38).

Changing the name of the SSID (USA)

X Press the button. or X Press Vehicle in the main function bar. The vehicle menu is displayed.

X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X Select System Settings. X To select WiFi: turn and press the controller. The Wi-Fi menu appears.

X To select Change SSID: turn and press the controller. A dialog for entering the SSID appears.

X Enter the new SSID. X To select : turn and press the controller. The new SSID is shown on the device to be connected and in the Connect UsingSecurity Key menu. i Device connections established using the previous SSID will no longer work after the SSID is changed. You have to reconnect these devices (Y page 38).

Wi-Fi 39

Sy st em

se tt in gs

Z

Connecting the device (Canada)

General notes The exact Wi-Fi connection procedure may vary depending on the device to be connected. Fol- low the instructions that are shown in the dis- play. Further information; see the manufactur- er's operating instructions.

Selecting a hotspot (Canada) X Press the button. or X Press Vehicle in the main function bar. The vehicle menu is displayed.

X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select System Settings: turn and press the controller.

X To select WiFi: turn and press the controller. The Wi-Fi menu appears. A search for hot- spots is carried out.

X To select a hotspot: turn and press the con- troller.

Connecting a device via WPS PBC (Can- ada) Requirement: for this type of connection, the device to be connected must support "Connect via push button". X Press the button. or X Press Vehicle in the main function bar. The vehicle menu is displayed.

X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X Select System Settings. X Select WiFi. The Wi-Fi menu appears.

X To select one of the hotspots that has been found: turn and press the controller.

X Select Connect via WPS PBC. X Press the push button on the device to be connected.

X To confirm the entry: press the controller.

Connecting a device via WPS PIN (Can- ada) Requirement: for this type of connection, the device to be connected must support "Connect using WPS PIN". X Press the button. or X Press Vehicle in the main function bar. The vehicle menu is displayed.

X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X Select System Settings. X To select WiFi: turn and press the controller. The Wi-Fi menu appears.

X To select one of the hotspots that has been found: turn and press the controller.

X Select Connect via WPS PIN. X Enter the WPS PIN generated by the multime- dia system into the device.

X To confirm the entry: press the controller.

Bluetooth settings

General information about Blue- tooth

Bluetooth-capable devices, e. g. mobile phones, need to comply with a certain profile in order to be connected to the multimedia sys- tem. Every Bluetooth device has its own spe- cific Bluetooth name. Bluetooth technology is a standard for short- range wireless data transmissions up to approx- imately 10 m. You can use Bluetooth to connect your mobile phone to the multimedia system, for example: Ruse the hands-free system Restablish an Internet connection Rlisten to music using Bluetooth Audio Rexchange vCards Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Blue- tooth Special Interest Group (SIG) Inc.

40 Bluetooth settings Sy st em

se tt in gs

Activating/deactivating Bluetooth

X Press the button. or X Press Vehicle in the main function bar. The vehicle menu is displayed.

X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select System Settings: turn and press the controller. A menu appears.

X To switch Activate Bluetooth on O or off : turn and press the controller.

Setting the system language

General information This function allows you to determine the lan- guage for the menu displays and the navigation messages. The selected language affects the characters available for entry.

i The navigation announcements are not available in all languages. If a language is not available, the navigation announcements will be in English.

i When you set the system language, the lan- guage of the Voice Control System will change accordingly. If it is not supported by the Voice Control System, English will be selected.

Setting the system language X Press the button. or X Press Vehicle in the main function bar. The vehicle menu is displayed.

X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select System Settings: turn and press the controller. A menu appears.

X To select Language : turn and press the con- troller. The list of languages appears. The # dot indi- cates the current setting.

X Select the desired language. The multimedia system loads the selected language and sets it.

Calling up the favorite functions

The favorites function can be called up as fol- lows: Rvia the System Settings menu Rvia the Favorites button on the controller (Y page 22) Rvia the Favorites button on the touchpad (Y page 23)

Calling up the Favorites function via the sys- tem menu X Press the button. or X Press Vehicle in the main function bar. The vehicle menu is displayed.

X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select System Settings : turn and press the controller. A menu appears.

X To select Favorite Functions : press the controller. The favorites are displayed.

X To select the desired function, e.g. Phonebook: turn and press the controller. A menu appears.

Calling up the Favorites function using the controller X Press the favorites button on the controller. The favorites are displayed.

X To select the desired function, e.g. Phonebook: turn and press the controller. Calling up the Favorites function via the touchpad X Press the favorites button on the touchpad. The favorites are displayed.

X To select the desired function, e.g. Phonebook: turn and press the controller.

Calling up the favorite functions 41

Sy st em

se tt in gs

Z

Exiting the Favorites function X Press the Favorites button again. or X Press the% button. Further information on the Favorites function (Y page 32).

Importing/exporting data

General notes ! Never remove the stick or card when writing data to theUSB stick or thememory card. You may otherwise lose data.

i Please remember that the NFTS file system is not supported. The FAT32 file system is recommended.

Using this function you can do the following with your personal data: Rtransfer your data from one multimedia sys- tem to another multimedia system (The transfer may be limited or not possible, depending on the vehicle's equipment.) Rmake a backup copy of your personal data (export data) and load it again (import data) Rprotect your data from unwanted export by activating a pin prompt (presetting: deactiva- ted )

You can either use an SD card or a USB storage device (e.g. a USB stick) as temporary storage. Further information on importing and exporting data can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Activating/deactivating PIN protec- tion

X Press the button. or X Press Vehicle in the main function bar. The vehicle menu is displayed.

X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select System Settings: turn and press the controller.

X To select Data Import/Export: turn and press the controller.

X To switch Activate PIN Protection on O or off : turn and press the controller. When activating PIN protection, you will be prompted to enter a PIN.

X To enter the 4-digit PIN and select : turn and press the controller. You will be prompted to enter the PIN again.

X Enter the PIN again and select . The PIN prompt now protects your personal data from unwanted export.

i If you deactivate your PIN protection, you will first be prompted to enter your PIN. If you have forgotten your PIN, a qualified specialist workshop can deactivate the PIN protection for you. Alternatively, you can deactivate PIN protection by resetting your personal data (Y page 43).

Importing/exporting data Connecting a USB storage device X Insert the SD memory card (Y page 141). or X Connect a USB device (e.g. a USB memory stick) (Y page 141).

Importing/exporting data i If you import data such as address data, the existing data on the multimedia system is overwritten. You will see a message to this effect. The multimedia system is restarted after the data import.

X Press the button. or X Press Vehicle in the main function bar. The vehicle menu is displayed.

42 Importing/exporting data Sy st em

se tt in gs

X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select System Settings: turn and press the controller. A menu appears.

X To select Data Import/Export: turn and press the controller.

X Select Import Data or Export Data. If PIN protection is activated, a PIN prompt appears when you select Export Data.

X To enter the 4-digit PIN and select : turn and press the controller. PIN protection is deactivated.

X To select Memory Card, USB 1 or USB 2: turn and press the controller. This function exports all the data to the selec- ted disc.

i You can export address data, bookmarks, system settings that you havemade and radio station lists, for example. Mercedes-Benz is not liable for any loss of data.

Reset function

General information You can reset the multimedia system to the fac- tory settings. This includes the deletion of all of your personal data on the multimedia system. These include: RStation presets REntries in the destination memory REntries in the list of previous destinations in the navigation system REntries in the address book RAuthorized telephone In addition, an activated PIN protection, which you have used to protect your data against unwanted export, will be deactivated. Resetting is recommended before selling or transferring ownership of your vehicle, for example. Mercedes-Benz is not liable for any loss of data.

Resetting the multimedia system X Press the button. or X Press Vehicle in the main function bar. The vehicle menu is displayed.

X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select System Settings : turn and press the controller.

X To select Reset : turn and press the control- ler. A prompt appears asking whether you wish to reset.

X Select Yes. A prompt appears again asking whether you really wish to reset.

X Select Yes. The multimedia system is reset to the factory settings and restarted.

Reset function 43

Sy st em

se tt in gs

Z

Your multimedia system equipment

These operating instructions describe all the standard and optional equipment of your multi- media system, as available at the time of going to press. Country-specific differences are pos- sible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not feature all functions described here. This also applies to safety-relevant systems and func- tions. Read the information on qualified specialist workshops in the vehicle Operator's Manual.

Important safety notes

G WARNING If you operate mobile communication equip- ment when driving, you may be distracted from the traffic situation. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate this equipment when the vehicle is stationary.

Youmust observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operatingmobile communications equipment in the vehicle.

Vehicle settings

Calling up vehicle settings X Press the button. or X Press Vehicle in the main function bar. The vehicle menu is displayed.

X To select Vehicle Settings: turn and press the controller.

X To select the desired vehicle setting: turn and press the controller. The main area with the setting element is active.

Selecting a different vehicle setting: X To activate the menu for selecting the vehicle setting: slide5 the controller.

Exiting the vehicle settings: X To select&: slide6 and press the con- troller.

Ambient lighting

General notes You can set the following for the ambient light- ing: RBrightness This setting changes the brightness of the ambient lighting. RColor This setting changes the color of the ambient lighting. RInterior welcome light When the driver's door is opened, the ambient lighting is activated for a short time.

Setting the brightness X Call up Vehicle Settings (Y page 44). X To select Ambient Light Brightness: turn and press the controller. The setting element is active.

X To change the brightness value: turn and press the controller.

You can find further information on the interior lighting in the vehicle Operator's Manual.

Setting the color X Call up Vehicle Settings (Y page 44). X To select Ambient Light Color: turn and press the controller. The setting element is active.

X To select a color: turn and press the control- ler.

You can find further information on the interior lighting in the vehicle Operator's Manual.

Setting the interior welcome light X Call up Vehicle Settings (Y page 44). X To select Interior Welcome Light: turn and press the controller.

X Press the controller. The function is switched on or off, depending on the previous status.

44 Vehicle settings Ve hi cl e fu nc tio

ns

You can find further information on the interior lighting in the vehicle Operator's Manual.

Switching locator lighting on/off When the Locator Lighting function is active, the exterior lighting is activated for 40 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked. The light switch must be set to. When you start the engine, the locator lighting is switched off and the automatic driving lights are activated. You can find further information on the auto- matic headlamp mode in the vehicle Operator's Manual. X Call up Vehicle Settings (Y page 44). X To select Locator Lighting: turn and press the controller.

X Press the controller. The function is switched on or off, depending on the previous status.

You can find further information on the locking feature in the vehicle Operator's Manual.

i There may be fewer settings or none depending on your vehicle's equipment.

Setting the switch-off delay time

Interior lighting switch-off delay time The interior lighting is activated for the duration of the switch-off delay time when the SmartKey is removed from the ignition lock. X Call up Vehicle Settings (Y page 44). X To select Interior Lighting DelayedSwitch-off: turn and press the controller. The setting element is active.

X To change the delayed switch-off time: turn and press the controller.

You can find further information on the interior lighting in the vehicle Operator's Manual.

Exterior lighting switch-off delay time If you switch on the Exterior LightingDelayed Switch-off function, the exterior lighting is switched on for a short time after the engine is switched off. The light switch must be set to.

The exterior lighting remains lit for 60 seconds after the engine is switched off. If you close all the doors and the tailgate, the exterior lighting switches off after the set time. X Call up Vehicle Settings (Y page 44). X To select Exterior Lighting DelayedSwitch-off: turn and press the controller. The setting element is active.

X To change the delayed switch-off time: turn and press the controller.

Displaying energy consumption and generated electrical energy A bar graph displays the energy consumption and the generated electrical energy. X Press Vehicle in the main function bar. The vehicle menu is displayed.

X To select Consumption: turn and press the controller. The energy consumption and the generated electrical energy for the last 15minutes of the journey is shown.

For further information on energy consumption, see the vehicle Operator's Manual.

Displaying the fuel consumption A bar graph displays the fuel consumption. X Press Vehicle in the main function bar. The vehicle menu is displayed.

X To select Consumption: turn and press the controller. The fuel consumption for the last 15 minutes of the journey is shown.

Switching the ionization on/off The ionization has a cleansing effect on the air in the vehicle interior. Further information (see the vehicle Operator's Manual). X Call up Vehicle Settings (Y page 44). X To select Ionization: turn and press the controller. The ionization is switched on or off, depend- ing on the previous status: press and turn the controller.

X To exit the menu: press the% button.

Vehicle settings 45

Ve hi cl e fu nc tio

ns

Z

Seats

Overview You can configure the following seat functions in the menu: RBackrest side bolsters RLumbar RSeat cushion RMassage RDynamics RSeat heating balance

i There may be fewer settings or none depending on your vehicle's equipment.

Selecting the adjustment function and seat X Press the button. or X To select Vehicle from themain function bar: turn and press the controller. The vehicle menu is displayed.

X To select Seat Settings: turn and press the controller. The seat settings menu is shown.

or X Press theT button on the controller. The menu for the seat setting appears.

X To select the required seat function: turn and press the controller.

X To switch between Driver and FrontPassenger : slide1 the controller.

Adjustment functions

Adjusting the backrest side bolsters X Call up the seat functions (Y page 46). X To select Backrest Sides: turn and press the controller.

X To change the setting: turn the controller. Youwill see the changes you havemade in the settings display.

X To exit the menu: press the% button.

Adjusting the seat contour in the lum- bar region of the seat backrest This function allows you to adjust the air cush- ions in the lumbar region of the backrest (4-way lumbar support). X Call up the seat functions (Y page 46). X To select Lumbar: turn and press the control- ler.

X To activate the setting element: press the controller.

X To change the setting: slide4 or1 the controller. The change will be visible in the setting ele- ment.

X To exit the menu: press the% button.

Adjusting the seat cushion X Call up the seat functions (Y page 46). X To select Seat Surface : turn and press the controller.

X To select a seat: slide1 the controller. X To change the setting: turn the controller. Youwill see the changes you havemade in the settings display.

X To exit the menu: press the% button.

Adjusting the driving dynamics X Call up the seat functions (Y page 46). X To select Dynamic Multicontour Seat : turn and press the controller.

X To select a seat: slide1 the controller. You can select: ROFF: R1: Level 1 (weak) R2: Level 2 (strong) X To select the setting: turn the controller. X To exit the menu: press the% button.

Massage programs

Overview You can select the followingmassage programs: RRelaxing Massage

46 Seats Ve hi cl e fu nc tio

ns

Massage the entire back, rising waves, sooth- ing downward movements RActivating Massage Mobilizing massage and rising and descend- ing dynamic waves RClassic Massage Single and twin waves moving upwards across the entire back RMobilizing Massage Mobilization via stronger single and twin wavesmoving upwards across the entire back

Selecting a massage program X Call up the seat functions (Y page 46). X To select Massage: turn and press the con- troller.

X To select a seat: slide1 the controller. X To select massage programs: turn and press the controller. The massage program runs for approximately 15 to 25 minutes, depending on the setting.

X To exit the menu: press the% button.

Seat heating balance The balance function controls the distribution of heat for the seat backrest and seat cushion. The balance function influences the currently set heating level of the seat heating (see the vehicle Operator's Manual). X Call up the seat functions (Y page 46). X To select Seat Heating Balance: turn and press the controller.

X To select a seat: slide1 the controller. X To change the setting: turn the controller. Youwill see the changes you havemade in the settings display.

The settings represent the following: R0 the backrest and seat cushion are evenly heated according to the setting selected with the seat heating button. R1 to 3 increasing the heat output to the seat cushion is reduced one level at a time. R1 to 3 decreasing the heat output to the backrest is reduced one level at a time.

X To exit the menu: press the% button.

Resetting all adjustments X Call up the seat functions (Y page 46). X To select Reset: turn and press the controller. X To select a seat: slide1 the controller. X To reset: press the controller. A prompt appears.

X To select Yes or No: turn and press the con- troller. If you select No the process is canceled. After selecting Yes all seat adjustments are reset to the default values (factory setting).

360 camera

General notes The 360 camera covers the immediate sur- roundings of the vehicle and assists you, for instance when parking or at exits with reduced visibility. The 360 camera is only an aid. It is not a replacement for your attention to your immedi- ate surroundings. You are always responsible for safe maneuvering and parking. Make sure that no persons or animals are in the maneu- vering range. Further information on the 360camera can be found in the vehicle Operator's Manual.

Displaying the 360 camera image The 360 camera image can be displayed if: Ryour vehicle is equipped with a 360 camera Rthe 360 Camera function is switched on (see the vehicle Operator's Manual)

X Press Vehicle in the main function bar. The vehicle menu is displayed.

X Select 360 Camera . The 360 camera image appears in split- screen mode.

You will see the previous view on the display if, when the function is switched on: Rturn the SmartKey to position1 in the igni- tion lock Ryou select transmission position P Rwhen you are driving at moderate speeds

360 camera 47

Ve hi cl e fu nc tio

ns

Z

Switching the display off manually X To select&: slide6 and press the con- troller.

Switching the display on automatically X You can switch on the 360 camera display automatically using the reverse gear (Y page 48).

Switching the 360 camera auto- matic mode on/off This function activates the 360 camera when reverse gear is engaged. X Press Vehicle in the main function bar. The vehicle menu is displayed.

X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select System Settings : turn and press the controller.

X To select 360 Camera : turn and press the controller. The 360 Camera menu appears.

X Select Activation by R gear . The function is switched on O or off .

Opening the camera cover for clean- ing X To select Open Camera Cover in the 360 cameramenu: turn the controller and press to confirm. The Please Wait... message appears for approximately three seconds. The camera cover opens.

The camera cover closes automatically if: Rthe ignition is switched off Rthe vehicle exceeds a moderate speed

i Depending on the vehicle's equipment, this function is not available.

Rear view camera

General notes The rear view camera covers the immediate sur- roundings behind the vehicle and assists you when parking.

The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not a replacement for your attention to your immedi- ate surroundings. You are always responsible for safe maneuvering and parking. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the maneuvering area while maneuvering and parking in parking spaces. There may be fewer settings depending on your vehicle's equipment. You can find further information about the rear view camera in the vehicle Operator's Manual.

Switching the rear view camera auto- matic mode on/off This function activates the rear view camera when reverse gear is engaged. X Press the button. or X Press Vehicle in the main function bar. The vehicle menu is displayed.

X Slide6 the controller. X To select System Settings : turn and press the controller.

X Select Rear View Camera . The Rear View Camera menu appears.

X Select Activation by R gear . The function is switched on O or off , depending on the previous status. When you start the vehicle and engage reverse gear, the area behind the vehicle is shown with guide lines in the display. For fur- ther information on the rear view camera; see the vehicle Operator's Manual.

Opening the camera cover for clean- ing X To select Open Camera Cover in the rear view camera menu: turn and press the con- troller. The Please Wait... message appears for approximately three seconds. The camera cover opens.

The camera cover closes automatically if: Rthe ignition is switched off Rthe vehicle pulls away

48 Rear view camera Ve hi cl e fu nc tio

ns

DYNAMIC SELECT

General notes Press DYNAMIC SELECT to configure the follow- ing settings and values for the Individual drive program: RDrive system RSuspension RSteering RClimate control RECO start/stop function

i In a few countries, the ECO start/stop func- tion is deactivated at the factory due to the available fuel grade. In this case, the ECO start/stop function is not available regardless of the display in the multimedia system dis- play.

For Mercedes-AMG vehicles, you can configure the following settings and adjustment values for the Individual drive program: RDrive system RSuspension RTransmission RESP (Electronic Stability Program) There may be fewer settings or set values, or none, depending on your vehicle's equipment. For further information on the Individual drive program; see the vehicle Operator's Manual.

Configuration using the DYNAMIC SELECT button X Use the DYNAMIC SELECT button to select the Individual drive program (see the vehicle Operator's Manual). A window appears after a short while.

X To confirm Adjust : press the controller. The Individual Configuration menu for setting the drive program appears.

X To select Drive, Suspension, Steering,Climate Control or Eco Start/StopFunction: turn and press the controller. X Select individual settings. The menu symbol, text and image show the selected setting.

Configuration via the DYNAMIC SELECT controller The DYNAMIC SELECT Controller is available for Mercedes-AMG vehicles. X Use theDYNAMICSELECT controller to select the Individual drive program; see the vehicle Operator's Manual. A window appears after a short while.

X To confirm Adjust : press the controller. The Individual Configuration menu for setting the drive program appears.

X To select Drive, Suspension, Transmission or ESP : turn and press the controller. X Select individual settings. The menu symbol, text and image show the selected setting.

Displaying vehicle data X Press Vehicle in the main function bar. The vehicle menu is displayed.

X To select DYNAMIC SELECT: turn and press the controller.

X Select Vehicle Data. Updates of the following data are displayed: RRoad type analogous to the selected drive program RG-force display of longitudinal and lateral acceleration RAccelerator and brake pedal activity RActivity of the suspension struts RWheel angle RVehicle level display (Mercedes-AMG vehi- cles)

The G-force display is not available in all of the drive programs. Daytime or night-time view is shown depending on the automatic light sensor.

Displaying engine data i There may be fewer displays depending on your vehicle's equipment.

DYNAMIC SELECT 49

Ve hi cl e fu nc tio

ns

Z

X Press Vehicle in the main function bar. The vehicle menu is displayed.

X To select DYNAMIC SELECT: turn and press the controller. The Individual Configuration andEngine Data menus appear.

X Select Engine Data. The following current data is displayed: REngine output REngine torque REngine oil temperature RTransmission oil temperature (Mercedes- AMG vehicles) ROn-board electrical system voltage i The values for engine output and engine tor- que may deviate from the nominal values. Items that can influence this are, for example: REngine speed RSea level RFuel grade ROutside temperature

Setting options You can choose from the following settings for the drive:

C Comfort

S Sport

S+ Sport Plus

M Manual

E Eco

You can make the following settings for the sus- pension:

C Comfort

S Sport

S+ Sport Plus

You can make the following settings for the steering:

C Comfort

S Sport

You can choose from the following settings for climate control:

E Eco

C Comfort

You can choose from the following settings for the ECO start/stop function:

On Switches the ECO start/stop function on

Off Switches the ECO start/stop function off

Setting options (Mercedes-AMG vehi- cles) You can choose from the following settings for the drive:

R Race

C Comfort

S Sport

S+ Sport Plus

You can make the following settings for the sus- pension:

C Comfort

S Sport

You can choose from the following settings for the transmission:

D Automatic

M Manual

You can choose from the following settings for the ESP (Electronic Stability Program):

S Sport

On Activates ESP (Elec- tronic Stability Pro- gram)

50 DYNAMIC SELECT Ve hi cl e fu nc tio

ns

You can choose from the following settings for the ECO start/stop function:

On Switches the ECO start/stop function on

Off Switches the ECO start/stop function off

Driving dynamics

General notes In the Driving Dynamicsmenu you can call up current vehicle and engine data. There may be less or no data and displays depending on your vehicle's equipment.

Displaying engine data X Press Vehicle in the main function bar. The vehicle menu is displayed.

X To select Driving Dynamics: turn and press the controller.

X Select Engine Data. The following current data is displayed: REngine output REngine torque REngine oil temperature RTransmission oil temperature (Mercedes- AMG vehicles) ROn-board electrical system voltage

i The values for engine output and engine tor- que may deviate from the nominal values. Items that can influence this are, for example: REngine speed RSea level RFuel grade ROutside temperature

Displaying vehicle data X Press Vehicle in the main function bar. The vehicle menu is displayed.

X To select Driving Dynamics: turn and press the controller.

X Select Vehicle Data. Updates of the following data are displayed: RRoad type analogous to the selected drive program RG-force display of longitudinal and lateral acceleration RAccelerator and brake pedal activity RActivity of the suspension struts RWheel angle RVehicle level display (Mercedes-AMG vehi- cles)

The G-force display is not available in all of the drive programs. Daytime or night-time view is shown depending on the automatic light sensor.

Driving dynamics 51

Ve hi cl e fu nc tio

ns

Z

Your multimedia system equipment

These operating instructions describe all the standard and optional equipment of your multi- media system, as available at the time of going to press. Country-specific differences are pos- sible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not feature all functions described here. This also applies to safety-relevant systems and func- tions. Read the information on qualified specialist workshops in the vehicle Operator's Manual.

Introduction

Important safety notes

G WARNING If you operate information systems and com- munication equipment integrated in the vehi- cle when driving, you may be distracted from the traffic situation. You could also lose con- trol of the vehicle. There is a risk of an acci- dent. Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you are not sure that this is possible, park the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions and operate the equip- ment when the vehicle is stationary.

Youmust observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system. The multimedia system calculates the route to the destination without taking account of the following, for example: Rtraffic lights Rstop and yield signs Rmerging lanes Rparking or stopping in a no parking/no stop- ping zone Rother road and traffic rules and regulations Rnarrow bridges The multimedia system may provide incorrect navigation recommendations if the actual street/traffic situation does not correspond with the digital map's data.

Examples of such deviations include: Ra diverted route Ra change in the direction of a one-way street Digital maps do not cover all areas nor all routes in an area. For this reason, you must always observe road and traffic rules and regulations during your journey. Road and traffic rules and regulations always have priority over the system's driving recommendations. Navigation announcements are intended to direct you while driving without diverting your attention from the road and driving. Please always use this feature instead of con- sulting the map display for directions. Looking at the icons ormap display can distract you from traffic conditions and driving, and increase the risk of an accident.

General notes

Operational readiness of the navigation system The navigation systemmust determine the posi- tion of the vehicle before first use or whenever operational status is restored. Therefore, you may have to drive for a while before precise route guidance is possible.

GPS reception Among other things, correct functioning of the navigation systemdepends onGPS reception. In certain situations, GPS reception may be impaired, there may be interference or there may be no reception at all, e.g. in tunnels or parking garages.

i Using roof carriers may impair the correct functioning of a roof antenna (phone, satellite radio, GPS).

Entry restriction For vehicles in certain countries, there is a data entry restriction. Entries can bemadewhen the selector lever is in positionj or the vehicle is stationary. When the restriction is active, certain entries cannot be made. This will be indicated by the fact that certain menu items are grayed out and cannot be selected.

52 Introduction Na

vi ga tio

n

The following entries are not possible, for exam- ple: Rentering the destination city and street RPOI entry via a name search Rediting and saving of entries Other entries are however possible, such as a keyword search and entering POIs in the vicinity of the destination or current position.

Switching to navigation mode

X Press the button. Themap shows the vehicle's current position.

or X Slide5 the controller (e.g. in radio mode). X To select Navi, turn and press the controller. Themap shows the vehicle's current position.

X To call up the map while navigation mode is switched on: press the button in any menu. The navigation menu appears.

X Press the controller. Themap shows the vehicle's current position.

Showing/hiding the menu

Using the menu, you can make a destination entry or select the navigation settings, for exam- ple. X To show: slide6 the controller when the map appears. If there has been no route calculated, Destination is marked. If a route has been calculated,y is marked.

X To hide: press the% button. or X Slide5 the controller. Full screen symbol: appears.

X Press the controller.

Moving the map

Requirement: themap is in full screenmode, the menu is faded out (Y page 53). X Press the controller. The crosshair is shown.

X Slide1,4 or2 the controller. The map moves in the corresponding direc- tion under the crosshair.

X Press the controller to show the menu. X Select Menu.

Introduction 53

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

Basic settings

Selecting the route type

X To switch to navigation mode: press the button.

X To show the menu: slide6 the controller. X To select Options: turn and press the con- troller.

X To select Route Settings: press the con- troller.

X To select the route type: turn and press the controller. A filled circle indicates the current selection. RWith active route guidance, the navigation system calculates a new route. Route guidance active: a destination has been entered and the route has been cal- culated. RIf there has been no route calculated, the navigation system uses the selection as the new basic setting.

Fast Route The navigation system calcu- lates a route with a short jour- ney time.

DynamicTrafficRoute Based on the Fast Route route type and includes traf- fic reports on the route for the route guidance.

DynamicTRF. RouteAfterRequest

If there are traffic reports, a prompt appears asking whether these reports should be considered in the route calculation.

Eco Route The navigation system calcu- lates an economic route. The journey may take slightly lon- ger compared to taking the fast route.

ShortRoute The navigation system calcu- lates a route with a short dis- tance.

The route types Dynamic Traffic Route andDynamic TRF. Route After Request use real-time traffic reports from SIRIUS satellite radio. Further Information on real-time traffic reports (Y page 76). X To calculate alternative routes: select Calculate Alternative Routes. Switch the function on O or off . Function activated: after each route calcula- tion, route alternatives are offered that cor- respond to the local conditions (Y page 74). If desired, you can have the navigation system calculate alternative routes even during route guidance (Y page 74).

Setting route options

X To switch to navigation mode: press the button.

X To show the menu: slide6 the controller. X To select Options: turn and press the con- troller.

X To select Route Settings: press the con- troller.

54 Basic settings Na

vi ga tio

n

X To avoid/use route options: select Avoid Options. A menu appears.

X Select one of the options. O: using or avoiding route options is enabled : using or avoiding route options is disabled RAvoid Area (Y page 85) You can define areas that you would like to avoid. RAvoid Highways RAvoid Ferries RAvoid Auto Trains RAvoid Tunnels RAvoid Unpaved Roads The function is not available in all countries. RUse Toll Roads The route calculation includes roads which require you to pay a usage fee (toll). RNumber of Occupants in the Vehicle: If your vehicle meets the access conditions for carpool lanes, you can use this function. Navigation includes carpool lanes if the car- pool lanes option is activated.

Depending on local conditions, the navigation system may not always be able to include all route options. A route may include a ferry, for instance, even though Avoid Ferries is ena- bled. The navigation system will notify you of this visually and through a navigation message.

X To use toll roads: turn and press the con- troller. A menu appears.

X Select an option. The options include using roads that require cash payment or electronic billing, or switch- ing off the function.

X To exit a menu: slide1 the controller.

Selecting announcements

X To switch to navigation mode: press the button.

X To show the menu: slide6 the controller. X To select Options: turn and press the con- troller.

X Select Settings. X Select an option. Switch the option on O or off .

AnnounceStreetNames The navigation system announ- ces the names of the roads onto which the upcoming change of direction leads.

AudioFadeout The volume of an active media source is automatically reduced during a navigation announcement.

AudibleInfo During PhoneCall

The navigation message is also given during telephone calls.

Gas onReserve Function activated: once the reserve fuel tank level is reached, amessage appears to help you start a gas station search.

AttentionAssist Function activated: if ATTEN- TION ASSIST displays a warn- ing in themultifunction display, a message appears in the mul- timedia system display when you drive on a highway. This can help you start a rest stop search. For further information on ATTENTION ASSIST, see the vehicle Operator's Manual.

Basic settings 55

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

Using car pool lanes You can include carpool lanes (HOV or car shar- ing lanes) in the route calculation. If you use HOV or carpool lanes, please observe the applicable laws as well as the local and time limitation conditions. Carpool lanes may only be used under certain conditions. They can normally be used when there are two people in the vehicle. However, there are also carpool lanes which can only be used when there are three or more people in the vehicle. In California, single driversmay also use the carpool lanes if the vehicle's emission or consumption values are below the prescribed levels. Carpool lanes may be reserved for specific times (e.g. during the peak period). Carpool lanes are indicated by a diamond sym- bol on specific road signs and on the road sur- face. The road signs may also include the des- ignation CARPOOL. The lanes are arranged as a separate lane next to the others or are built as a physically separate lane. Depending on the setting under Number ofOccupants in the Vehicle:, the navigation system uses carpool lanes when calculating the route. During route guidance, visual and audible driving directions provide guidance into and out of carpool lanes. X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show the menu: slide6 the controller. X To select Options: turn and press the con- troller.

X Select Route Settings. X Select Avoid Options. X Select Number of Occupants in theVehicle:. A menu appears. The # dot indicates the cur- rent setting.

X To select the number: turn and press the con- troller.

Destination entry

Important safety notes

G WARNING If you operate information systems and com- munication equipment integrated in the vehi- cle when driving, you may be distracted from the traffic situation. You could also lose con- trol of the vehicle. There is a risk of an acci- dent. Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you are not sure that this is possible, park the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions and operate the equip- ment when the vehicle is stationary.

Youmust observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system. Destination entry may be blocked while driving, depending on the country specifications.

Using an address

Calling up the address entry menu

X To switch to navigation mode: press the button.

X To show the menu: slide6 the controller. X To select Destination: turn and press the controller.

X Select Address Entry.

56 Destination entry Na

vi ga tio

n

Address entry options Examples of how you can enter an address: Rcity or ZIP code, street, house number Rcity or ZIP code, street Rcity or ZIP code, center Rcity or ZIP code, street, intersection Rstreet, city or ZIP code, house number Rstreet, city or ZIP code, intersection The address can be entered faster by entering the street before the city if the address has an unusual street name. While entering an address in the character bar, you can call up other destination entry options: Rkeyword search using (Y page 59) Rthe map via Map (Y page 63) RPOIs via POIs (Y page 61)

Entering an address

The example shows you how to enter a city, street and house number for an address, e.g. for your home address. X In the address entry menu, select Street: press the controller (Y page 56). The city in which the vehicle is currently loca- ted is at the top of the list.

X Enter BROADWAY. Character entry (Y page 30).

X To call up the list: slide5 the controller repeatedly until the character bar disappears.

or X To select the symbol: turn and press the controller.

X To select City: press the controller. X Enter the city, e.g. New York. Then call up the list and select an entry. Proceed in the same way as when entering a street.

X To select No.: press the controller. X Enter the house number. Then call up the list and select an entry. Proceed in the same way as when entering a street. The address entry menu shows the address.

The city in which the vehicle is currently located (current vehicle position) is at the top of the list of cities. When destinations are entered using the character bar, the locations for which route guidance has already been carried out are more prominently available. You can enter any of the cities, streets, ZIP codes, etc. which are stored in the digital map. However, ZIP codes are not available for some countries. State/province and city are sufficient to start navigating. You can enter either a city or a ZIP code. The street and house number complete the destination address.

Entering additional address data You can enter additional address data: RState/province You can use Last Used to select the last selected state (USA) or province (Canada). You can also selectMexico and The Bahamas. RZIP code Entering a ZIP code will delete a previously entered city. RCenter

Destination entry 57

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

Entering a center will delete a previously entered street. RIntersection Entering an intersection will delete a previ- ously entered house number.

X Select the address entry menu (Y page 56). X To select State/Province, ZIP Code, Ctr. or Intersection: turn, slide6 and press the controller.

X Select an entry (Y page 57).

Saving an address You can store the address entered as: Ra home address in the address book Ra navigable address book contact For further information on the address book, see (Y page 103) Ra personal destination on the SD card (Y page 80)

X Call up the address entry menu (Y page 56). X To select Save: slide6, turn and press the controller.

X As the home address: select As "My Address". The home address is stored in the list of con- tacts under the entry My Address.

X As a contact: select As New Address Book Entry.

X Select Not Classified, Home or Work. X Enter a surname and first name (Y page 30). X To select the symbol: turn and press the controller. The destination address is saved in the address book as a navigable contact.

Starting route calculation

The entered destination appears in the address entry menu. X To confirm Start or Continue: press the controller. If you select Start: the route is calculated with the current route settings (Y page 54). While route calculation is in progress, an arrow will indicate the direction to your des- tination. Once the route has been calculated, route guidance begins. If the vehicle is trav- eling on a non-digitized road, the system dis- plays the linear distance to the destination, the direction to the destination and the RoadNot Mapped message. Selection Continue: If Calculate Alternative Routes is activated, alternative routes are calculated (Y page 54). You can display these and select them for route guid- ance (Y page 74). If route guidance has already been activated, a prompt will appear asking whether you wish to end the current route guidance.

X To select Cancel Active Route Guidance or Set as Intermediate Destination: turn and press the controller.Cancel Active Route Guidance cancels the current route guidance and starts route calculation to the new destination. Set as Intermediate Destination adds the new destination in addition to the existing

58 Destination entry Na

vi ga tio

n

destination and opens the intermediate des- tinations list. i The route is calculated using the digital map data. The calculation time depends on the distance from the destination, for example. The route may differ from the ideal route, e.g. due to incompletemap data. Please also refer to the notes about the digital map (Y page 87).

Keyword search

Entering keywords

The keyword search is used to help find desti- nations using fragments of words. If you enable the appropriate setting in the search options, the keyword search is tolerant of errors (Y page 60). It can be used for an address or a POI. For exam- ple, you can search for the Empire State Building in New York. The keyword search finds geographically toler- ant hits. If, for example, you are searching for a street located on the edge of a major city, the search will also cover adjacent smaller cities. The keyword search supports the character sets of the system languages available. X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show the menu: slide6 the controller. X To select Destination: turn and press the controller.

X Select Keyword Search. X Enter the first few letters of the city and street, e.g. NEW and EMP. While entering the information, the number of exact matches and total number of matches is shown.

---/--- is displayed if fewer than three char- acters have been entered. 999+ is displayed if there are too many hits.

X Select the symbol. The search results are displayed (Y page 59).

Selecting search results

The search results are divided into categories, such as addresses. The number of exact matches and total number of matches is shown in brackets. Further search results are displayed, if POISearch and/or Fuzzy Search are activated in the search options (Y page 60).

X To select an address: press the controller. The search results are displayed.

Exact hits are shown at the very top of the list. Hits are listed alphabetically. The search term that you entered is highlighted in orange in the entries. X Select an entry: turn and press the controller. The address entrymenu appears, showing the destination address.

X To start route calculation: select Start.

Destination entry 59

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

X To select POI: select POIs in the Vicin ity or All POIs by turning and pressing con- troller. A list appears. The search results are dis- played according to the linear distance, start- ing with those closest.

X Select a POI. The POI is shown.

X To start route calculation: select Start. X To select online search: select Online Search by turning and pressing the control- ler. The search switches to the online functions. Online search requirement (USA): mbrace must be activated for Internet access (Y page 122). Requirement for the online map display (Can- ada): a mobile phone is connected to the mul- timedia system via Bluetooth (Y page 91) or USB (Y page 150).

Selecting search options X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show the menu: slide6 the controller. X To select Destination: turn and press the controller.

X Select Keyword Search. X To select Search Options: slide5, turn and press the controller.

X Select Fuzzy Search or POI Search. Switch the setting on O or off . The error-tolerant search is useful if parts of the address are incomplete or the spelling is unclear. The POI search takes into account points of interest in the search.

Selecting a state/province X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show the menu: slide6 the controller. X To select Destination: turn and press the controller.

X Select Keyword Search.

X To select State/Province: slide5, turn and press the controller. The states or provinces are sorted alphabeti- cally.

X To select a state/province: turn and press the controller.

Using online search Requirement (USA): mbrace must be activated for Internet access (Y page 122). Requirement (Canada): a mobile phone is con- nected to themultimedia system via Bluetooth (Y page 91) or USB (Y page 150). X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show the menu: slide6 the controller. X To select Destination: turn and press the controller.

X Select Keyword Search. X Enter the first few letters of the city and street.

X To select Online Search: slide5, turn and press the controller. The search switches to the online functions.

Selecting a destination from the list of last destinations

The last 50 destinations are stored automati- cally. X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show the menu: slide6 the controller. X To select Destination: turn and press the controller.

X Select From Last Destinations.

60 Destination entry Na

vi ga tio

n

X Select the destination. The address entrymenu appears, showing the destination address.

X To start route calculation: select Start.

Selecting an address book contact as a destination

You can select navigable address book contacts as the destination. These are identified by the L symbol. If you have already entered and saved your home address, you can select this as the destination by using My Address. X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show the menu: slide6 the controller. X To select Destination: turn and press the controller.

X Select From Contacts. X Select the destination. The address entrymenu appears, showing the contact and associated destination address.

X To start route calculation: select Start.

Selecting a destination from POIs

Calling up the POI menu

X To switch to navigation mode: press the button.

X To show the menu: slide6 the controller. X To select Destination: turn and press the controller.

X Select From POIs.

Defining the position for the POI search

Selection Instructions

Near Destination (when route guidance is active)

X Call up the POI menu (Y page 61). X To select Near Destination: press the controller. X Select a POI category (Y page 62).

Current Position Searches in the vicinity of the current vehicle posi- tion.

X Call up the POI menu (Y page 61). X To select Current Position: turn and press the controller. X Select a POI category (Y page 62).

Destination entry 61

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

Selection Instructions

Other City After entering a city, the search is performed within the city's bounda- ries

Option 1 X Call up the POI menu (Y page 61). X To select Other City: turn and press the controller. X Select the state/province (Y page 57), if desired. X Enter the city (Y page 57). X Select a POI category (Y page 62). Option 2 X Enter a city in the address entry menu (Y page 57). X To select POIs: slide6, turn and press the controller. X Select a POI category (Y page 62).

Search By Name Searches for all POIs on the digital map or around one of the three previ- ously specified positions

X Call up the POI menu (Y page 61). X To select Search By Name: turn and press the controller. X Select All POIs or one of the three previously selected positions. The POI list with character bar appears.

X Enter a name. or X To select Mercedes-Benz Service: turn and press the controller.

Search By Phone Number All POIs with a telephone number can be selected.

X Call up the POI menu (Y page 61). X To select Search By Phone Number: turn and press the control- ler. You will see a list of phone numbers.

X Enter the telephone number. The telephone number consists of: Rthe country code (international dialing code) Rthe area code When entering the area code, omit the leading "0" Rthe telephone number of the participating caller

Selecting a POI category

POI categories appear after choosing the menu items Near Destination, Current Position and after entering another city.

62 Destination entry Na

vi ga tio

n

X Turn and press the controller. TheG symbol after an entry shows that fur- ther categories are available.

X Select a sub-category. The POI search covers a 240 mi (400 km) radius around the selected position. Once the search is completed, the POI list is displayed. The search results display the following infor- mation: Ran arrow that shows the linear direction to the POI (search around vehicle position) Rthe linear distance to the POI Rthe name of the POI

X Select a POI. The complete address of the POI is shown.

Selecting a POI Requirement for "Calling up a POI": a mobile phone must be connected to the multimedia system (Y page 91). Requirements for "Viewing the vicinity of the destination" and "Loading data from the Inter- net" (USA): mbrace must be activated for Inter- net access (Y page 122). Requirements for "Viewing the vicinity of the destination" and "Loading data from the Inter- net" (Canada): a mobile phone must be connec- ted to the multimedia system via Bluetooth (Y page 91) or USB (Y page 150).

The complete address of the POI is shown. X To view the vicinity of the destination: select: by turning and pressing the con- troller. If street images are available, the street in the vicinity of the destination address is shown.

X To call up the map: select Map. X Move the map, change the map scale (Y page 63) and select the POI.

X To call up a POI: select Call. If a phone number is available, themultimedia system switches to the telephone function.

X To load data from the Internet: select www. If an Internet address is available, data is loa- ded from the Internet.

X To store a POI: select Save. The POI can be saved as: Rhome address Ra navigable address book contact (Y page 103) Ra personal destination on the SD card (Y page 80)

X To start route calculation: to select Start or Continue: turn and press the controller. If Calculate Alternative Routes is ena- bled in the basic settings, the menu itemContinue is displayed instead ofStart(Y page 54).

Using the map

: Crosshair ; Distance of crosshair position from current

vehicle position X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show the menu: slide6 the controller. X To select Destination: turn and press the controller.

X Select Using Map. The map with crosshair is shown.

X Tomove themap: slide1,4 or2 the controller.

X To change themapscale: turn the controller until the desired map scale is selected. The scale is displayed at the bottom of the display.

Destination entry 63

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

To enlarge the map: turn the controller coun- ter-clockwise. To zoom the map out: turn the controller clockwise.

X To select a destination: press the controller. If several destinations are available in the area around the crosshair, these are dis- played. The list may show the Menu menu item.

X Press the controller to show the menu. X To select a destination from the selection list: turn and press the controller. If the digital map provides navigable address data, you will see the destination address in the address entry menu.

X To start route calculation: select Start.

Entering intermediate destinations

Introduction You can also map the route to the destination yourself by entering up to four intermediate des- tinations. The sequence of the intermediate des- tinations can be changed at any time. The multimedia system provides a selection of predefined POI categories, e.g. Restaurants for a quick selection. You can also use the des- tination entry options to enter intermediate des- tinations.

Creating intermediate destinations X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show the menu: slide6 the controller. X To select Destination: turn and press the controller.

X Select Intermediate Destinations.

X To select a POI category or Other: turn and press the controller. After selecting one of the POI categories, available POIs are displayed: Ralong the route Rin the vicinity The multimedia system first searches for des- tinations on the route. The search for desti- nations is then initiated in the area around the current vehicle position.

X After selecting Other, select one of the des- tination entry options.

Selection Step

Address Entry X Enter a destination by address (Y page 57).

KeywordSearch X Select a destination using a keyword search (Y page 59).

From LastDestinations X Select a destination from the list of last des- tinations (Y page 60).

From Contacts X Select a contact from the address book as the destination (Y page 61).

From POIs X Select a point of interest (Y page 61).

Using Map X Enter a destination using the map (Y page 63).

From MemoryCard X Select a personal POI (Y page 68).

FromMercedes-Benz Apps X Enter a destination from Mercedes-Benz Apps (Y page 66).

Using Geo-Coordinates X Enter a destination using the geo-coordinates (Y page 66).

64 Destination entry Na

vi ga tio

n

X To select a POI: turn the controller and press to confirm. After selecting a POI or entering a destination, the address of the intermediate destination is displayed. After entering a destination using the map, the address entry menu is displayed. Start is highlighted.

X To call up a map: select Map by turning and pressing the controller. You can move the map and select the desti- nation.

X To make a call: select Call. If the intermediate destination has a tele- phone number and a mobile phone is con- nected to the multimedia system (Y page 91), the call is connected.

X To load data from the Internet: select www. If an Internet address is available, data is loa- ded from the Internet.

X To store an intermediate destination in the destination memory: select Save (Y page 80).

X To accept an intermediate destination: select OK by pressing the controller. The destination is entered in the intermediate destinations menu. Start Route Guidance is highlighted.

X To enter another intermediate destina- tion: slide5 the controller and highlight Add New:.

X Press the controller. X Proceed as described above.

Editing intermediate destinations The following editing options are available: RYou can change intermediate destinations. RYou can switch the sequence of the inter- mediate destinations in the intermediate des- tinations menu. RYou can delete intermediate destinations.

X To select an intermediate destination in the intermediate destinations menu: turn and press the controller. A menu appears.

X To change an intermediate destination: select Edit in the menu.

X Select a new intermediate destination from a category or via Other.

X To select OK: turn and press the controller. The intermediate destinations menu appears and displays the changed intermediate desti- nation.

You can change the order of the intermediate destinations entered and the destination. To change the order, at least one intermediate des- tination and the destination must have been entered. X To change the order: in the menu, select Move.

X Turn the controller andmove the intermediate destination or destination to the desired posi- tion.

X Press the controller. X To delete an intermediate destination: select Delete in the menu.

Destination entry 65

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

Accepting intermediate destinations for the route X To select Start Route Guidance in the intermediate destinations menu: press the controller. The route is calculated with the entered inter- mediate destinations. If Calculate Alternative Routes is ena- bled in the basic settings, the Continuemenu item is displayed (Y page 54). If an intermediate destination was passed during route guidance, a green tick mark will be entered in the intermediate destinations menu. Once the route has been recalculated, the intermediate destination is deleted from the intermediate destinations menu.

Saving as a personal route X Insert the SD memory card (Y page 141). X To select Save As Personal Route in the intermediate destinations menu: turn and press the controller. The route is saved on the SD card under Personal Routes.

Searching for a gas station when the fuel level is low Requirement: the setting Gas on Reservemust be enabled (Y page 55). If the fuel tank reserve level is displayed, youwill see the Reserve Fuel Would you like tostart a search for surrounding gasstations? message. X To select Yes or No: turn and press the con- troller. If you select Yes: the gas station search starts. When the search is complete, a list of the gas stations available along the route or in the vicinity is displayed. If you select No: the search is canceled.

X Select the gas station. The address of the gas station is displayed.

X To select Start: press the controller. The gas station selected is set in the inter- mediate destinations menu as the next inter- mediate destination not yet reached. Route guidance begins.

Entering a destination from Mercedes-Benz Apps Requirement (USA): mbrace is activated for the Mercedes-Benz Apps (Y page 122). Requirement (Canada): a mobile phone is con- nected to themultimedia system via Bluetooth (Y page 91) or USB (Y page 150). X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show the menu: slide6 the controller. X To select Destination: turn and press the controller.

X Select From Mercedes-Benz Apps. The list of Mercedes-Benz Apps appears.

Using geo-coordinates X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show the menu: slide6 the controller. X To select Destination: turn and press the controller.

X Select Using Geo-Coordinates. Geo-coordinates are entered in degrees, minutes and seconds.

X To enter the latitude and longitude coor- dinates: turn the controller to change the value.

X To move the selection within the line: slide 1 the controller.

X To move the selection between lines: slide 4 the controller.

X To confirm the value: press the controller. X To save a destination: to select Save Cur rent Station/Channel: turn and press the controller. The destination can be stored as: Ra home address in the address book Ra navigable address book contact For further information on the address book, see (Y page 103) Ra personal destination on the SD card (Y page 80)

Starting route calculation X To select Start Route Guidance: turn and press the controller.

66 Destination entry Na

vi ga tio

n

Personal POIs and routes

General notes The use of personal POIs for displaying traffic surveillance equipment is not permitted in every country. Please observe the country-specific regulations and always drive at a suitable speed. Personal POIs are filed in categories: RNot Classified Standard entry for personal POIs RMercedes-Benz Apps Personal POIs (destinations, routes) that you have imported via the online functions RCategories which you have created yourself, e.g. on your PC

Personal routes are not categorized.

Settings for personal POIs

Displaying on the map Requirements: an SD card with personal POIs is inserted (Y page 141). All personal POIs of the selected category are displayed on themapwith a corresponding sym- bol. If the "Alert when approaching" function (Y page 67) is activated, the symbols are dis- played up to a map scale of 2 km (2 mi). X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show the menu: slide6 the controller. X To select Options: turn and press the con- troller.

X Select Personal POIs. X Select Show on Map. Themenu displays the categories available on the SD card.

X To select a category: turn and press the controller. All personal POIs in the selected category are displayed O or not displayed , depending on the previous status.

Alert when approaching Requirements: an SD card with personal POIs is inserted (Y page 141).

If the vehicle is approaching a personal POI and the functions are enabled, the personal POI is highlighted on the map and an audible signal sounds. For this purpose, both the corresponding func- tion Alert When Approaching and the cate- gory containing the personal POI must be acti- vated. X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show the menu: slide6 the controller. X To select Options: turn and press the con- troller.

X Select Personal POIs. X Select Alert When Approaching. Themenu displays the categories available on the SD card.

X Select Audible or Optical. The function is switched on O or off , depending on the previous status.

X To select a category: turn and press the controller. The function is switched on O or off , for all personal POIs of this category, depending on the previous setting.

Saving personal POIs and routes

General notes Personal POIs and routes are geodata which are saved in open GPX format (GPS Exchange for- mat) on the SD card.

Personal POI from current vehicle posi- tion or crosshair position X Insert the SD memory card (Y page 141). X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X When the map is displayed, press the con- troller until a message appears. The current vehicle position is saved to theNot Classified category on the SD card and also stored in the "Last destinations" memory (Y page 81). If the "Move map" function is selected (Y page 53), the crosshair position is saved. i If no SD card is inserted, the personal POI will only be stored in the "Last destinations" memory.

Personal POIs and routes 67

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

Personal POI from destination address X Insert the SD memory card (Y page 141). X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X Call up the address entry menu and enter the destination address (Y page 56).

X To select Save: slide6 the controller. X Turn and press the controller. X To select To Memory Card: turn and press the controller.

X Enter the name. The current address is saved in the NotClassified category on the SD card.

i You can select a destination from the FromLast Destinations or From Contacts memories and save it on the SD card. RFrom Last Destinations (Y page 60) RFrom Contacts (Y page 61)

Personal route from a tour including intermediate destinations X Insert the SD memory card (Y page 141). X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X Enter a destination, e.g. by address (Y page 56).

X Start route calculation (Y page 58). X Create intermediate destinations (Ypage64). X To select Save As Personal Route in the intermediate destinations menu: turn and press the controller. The route is saved in the Personal Routes folder on the SD card.

Importing personal POIs and routes via Mercedes-Benz Apps You can use Mercedes-Benz Apps (e.g. Down- load POI) to import destinations to the naviga- tion system. These have their own symbol and are filed in the Mercedes-Benz Apps category. You can save the imported destinations and routes as personal POIs and routes (Y page 67). When importing routes, please note: RThe Mercedes-Benz Apps may generate a route based on a different map from the one used by the multimedia system. Points on the

route may therefore be situated off the digital roads. RThe Mercedes-Benz Apps minimize the num- ber of route points offered. For this reason an imported route com- menced in the multimedia system may devi- ate from the original route from the Mercedes-Benz Apps.

Selecting and editing personal POIs and routes

Selecting X Insert the SD memory card (Y page 141). X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show the menu: slide6 the controller. X To select Destination: turn and press the controller.

X Select From Memory Card. X To select a category or Personal Routes: turn and press the controller. The available personal POIs or route entries are displayed.

X Select personal POI or personal route. The address of the personal POI appears or the personal route is displayed in the map.

If a large number of entries are stored, a register for quick selection appears. Personal POIs and routes can be stored with different character sets (e.g. Latin, Cyrillic, Arabic). X To select a register: slide9 the control- ler.

X Select a character by turning the controller.

Editing

The example shows a personal route.

68 Personal POIs and routes Na

vi ga tio

n

X Select personal POI or personal route (Y page 68).

X To explore a personal POI or route: slide 5 and press the controller to select Map. The map with the crosshair appears and shows the destination.

X Scroll the map (Y page 53). X Set the map scale (Y page 82). X To return to themenu: press the% button. X To call the personal POI: turn and press the controller to select Call. If a mobile phone is connected to the multi- media system and the telephone number is available, the call is connected (Y page 97).

X To change the name: turn and press the controller to select Edit.

X Select Change Name or Edit Icon. X To change name: enter character (Y page 30). X To delete a personal POI or route: turn and press the controller to select Delete. A prompt will appear.

X Select Yes or No. If you select Yes, the personal destination or personal route is deleted.

X To select the outward and return routes: select Swap by turning and pressing the con- troller. The starting and destination positions of your personal route, and thus the direction for route guidance, are switched round. One-way streets or restricted intersections are taken into consideration. Therefore, the outward and return routes may differ from each other.

X To save a personal POI: turn and press the controller to select Save.

X Continue saving (Y page 80). X To start route guidance: select Start by turning and pressing the controller.

Recording the route

General notes When recording the route, bear in mind the fol- lowing: RIf the SD card is inserted, it must not be removed during recording. RIf route recording is started manually, it must be finished manually before the multimedia system is switched off. RThe multimedia system minimizes the num- ber of route points recorded. Therefore when the recorded route is subsequently com- menced, it may differ from the route that was originally recorded.

Starting/finishing route recording X Insert the SD memory card (Y page 141). X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show the menu: slide6 the controller. X To select Destination: turn and press the controller.

X Select From Memory Card. X Select Start Route Recording. The route is recorded and REC appears at the bottom edge of the screen.

X To stop recording, select End RouteRecording from the menu. The route is stored under Personal Routes.

Displaying/editing the recorded route

X Insert the SD memory card (Y page 141). X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show the menu: slide6 the controller.

Personal POIs and routes 69

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

X To select Destination: turn and press the controller.

X Select From Memory Card. X Select Personal Routes. Previously recorded routes are displayed.

X To select a route: turn and press the control- ler. The map appears with a menu. The recorded route is shown on the map in blue.

X To start route calculation: select Start. X To change the name and symbol: select Edit.

X Select Change Name or Edit Icon. X To change name: enter character (Y page 30). X To change symbol: select a symbol. The symbol is saved.

Route guidance

General notes Always observe the traffic regulations when driving. Road and traffic rules and regulations always have priority over system driving recom- mendations. The multimedia system calculates the route to the destination without taking account of the following, for example: Rtraffic lights Rstop and yield signs Rparking or stopping restrictions Rroad narrowing Rtemporary traffic rules and regulations The multimedia system may give differing navi- gation commands if the actual street/traffic sit- uation does not correspond with the digital map's data. For example, if the road layout or the direction of a one-way street has been changed. Route guidance begins once a route has been calculated (Y page 58). The multimedia system guides you to your des- tination bymeans of navigation announcements in the form of audible navigation announce- ments and route guidance displays. Navigation messages guide you during the jour- ney without distracting you from traffic condi- tions or driving. Please always use this feature instead of consulting the map display for direc-

tions. The symbols or the map display could dis- tract you from traffic conditions and driving. The route guidance displays can be seen if nav- igation mode is switched on. If you do not follow the navigation announce- ments or if you leave the calculated route, the multimedia system automatically calculates a new route to the destination. If the digital map contains the corresponding information, the following applies: RDuring route guidance, the multimedia sys- tem tries to avoid roads with restricted access. These include, for example, roads which are closed to through-traffic. RRoads that have time restrictions (e.g. closed on Sundays and public holidays) are consid- ered for route guidance on dayswhen they are open. For this purpose, the relevant times must be correctly stored in the database.

Change of direction

Overview Changes of direction have three phases: RPreparation phase RAnnouncement phase RChange-of-direction phase Changes in direction are also shown in the mul- tifunction display of the instrument cluster (see the vehicle Operator's Manual).

Preparation phase The multimedia system prepares you for the upcoming driving maneuver, e.g. with the announcement "Prepare to turn right". You see the full-screen map.

70 Route guidance Na

vi ga tio

n

Announcement phase

: Point at which the change of direction takes place (white dot)

; Change of direction (turn right here) = Distance to the next change of direction The multimedia system announces the immi- nent change of direction. The change of direc- tion is announced ahead of time, with the announcement "Turn right in 300 meters", for example. The display is now split into two sectors. The map is shown on the left side of the display, and a detailed image of the intersection or a 3D image of the imminent change of direction is shown on the right side of the display.

Change-of-direction phase

The multimedia system announces the immedi- ate change of direction. The change of direction is announced ahead of time, e.g. with the announcement "Now turn right". The display is split in two like in the announce- ment phase. The change of direction is performed when the light-colored bar on the right drops down to 0 ft and the current vehicle position symbol has reached the white change-of-direction point.

When the change of direction is completed, the map will appear in full screen mode again.

Display on highways

The image shows an example of route guidance at a highway intersection when driving on a highway.

Lane recommendations

Display on multi-lane roads

: Lanes not recommended (dark gray) ; Possible lane (light gray) = Recommended lanes (white) If the digital map contains the relevant data, the multimedia system can display lane recommen- dations on multi-lane roads for the next change of direction. Lane not recommended:: you will not be able to complete the next change of direction if you stay in this lane. Possible lane;: you will be able to complete the next change of direction in this lane. Recommended lane=: in this lane you will be able to complete the next change of direction and the one after that.

Route guidance 71

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

Lane recommendations are also shown in the multifunction display of the instrument cluster (see the vehicle Operator's Manual).

Approaching new lanes

: Approaching new lane During the change of direction, new lanes may be added. These will be shown in the display of lane recommendations with a lower boundary line.

Highway information

Display mode

Requirement: the Highway Information map content must be enabled (Y page 84). While driving on the highway, gas stations, rest stops, rest areas and highway exits are dis- played along with their immediate distances from the current vehicle position.

Calling up the selection mode

X When highway information is displayed, slide 9 the controller. Themarker is on the highway information. The associated position is highlighted on themap.

X To select the desired rest stop/freeway exit: turn and press the controller. The available POIs are displayed.

Starting route guidance to a POI

Highway information enables route guidance to a POI and other functions. X To select a POI: turn the controller and press to confirm. The POI details are displayed. You can perform the following functions: RStore in the address book (Y page 80) RSave to the SD card (Y page 80) RView on the map (Y page 85) RCall, if a mobile phone is connected and a phone number is available (Y page 97) RView the vicinity of the destination Requirements USA: street images are avail- able and mbrace is activated for Internet access (Y page 122). Requirements Canada: street images are available and a mobile phone is connected

72 Route guidance Na

vi ga tio

n

to the multimedia system via Bluetooth (Y page 91) or USB (Y page 150). RLoad data from the Internet Requirements USA: an Internet address is available and mbrace is activated for Inter- net access (Y page 91). Requirements Canada: an Internet address is available and a mobile phone is connec- ted to the multimedia system via Blue- tooth (Y page 91) or USB (Y page 150). RSelect for route guidance and calculate a route to it (Y page 58)

Using the traffic jam function

Highway information enables the use of the traf- fic jam function. The remaining route on the highway in this case is blocked in the direction of travel from the selected exit. X To select Detour: turn and press the control- ler. The traffic jam function appears (Y page 75).

Destination reached

Once the destination is reached, you will see the checkered flag. Route guidance is finished.

Navigation announcements

Repeating navigation announcements If you missed the current navigation announce- ment, you can call it up again. X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show the menu: slide6 the controller. X To select+: turn and press the controller.

i If you previously assigned the Repeat Spoken Driving Recomm. function to the Favor- ites button, you can select the function using the Favorites button instead (Y page 41).

Setting the volume manually X During a navigation announcement, turn the

q control knob. i When you start the engine, the volume will be at its lowest setting.

Switching navigation announcements on/off X To deactivate navigation announcements: during a navigation announcement, press the 8 button on the control panel.

or X During a navigation announcement, press the 8 button on the multifunction steering wheel. The Spoken driving recommendationshave been deactivated. message appears.

X To switch navigation announcements back on: slide6 the controller.

X To select+: turn and press the controller. The multimedia system automatically switches the navigation announcements back on when: Ra new route is calculated Rthe multimedia system is switched back on Rthe vehicle is started A navigation message is given if the route is recalculated during dynamic route guidance due to new traffic reports (Y page 76).

Route guidance 73

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

Canceling/continuing route guidance

Canceling route guidance X Slide6 the controller. The menu is shown.

X To select Destination, turn and press the controller.

X Select Cancel Route Guidance. The blue route line is no longer shown on the map.

Resuming route guidance

X Slide6 the controller. The menu is shown.

X To select Destination: turn and press the controller.

X Select Continue Route Guidance. The multimedia system calculates the route.

Route information

Destination information

X To switch to navigation mode: press the button.

X To show the menu: slide6 the controller. X To select Route: turn and press the controller.

X Select Destination Information. The destination and existing intermediate destinations are displayed with distances, travel time and arrival time.

X To select destination or intermediate des- tination: turn and press the controller. The address appears. You can use these functions for the destina- tion or intermediate destination: RStore in the address book (Y page 80) RSave to the SD card (Y page 80) RView on the map (Y page 85) RCall if a mobile phone is connected and a phone number is available (Y page 97) RView the vicinity of the destination Requirements USA: street images are avail- able and mbrace is activated for Internet access (Y page 122). Requirements Canada: street images are available and a mobile phone is connected to the multimedia system via Bluetooth (Y page 91) or USB (Y page 150). RLoad data from the Internet Requirements USA: an Internet address is available and mbrace is activated for Inter- net access (Y page 91). Requirements Canada: an Internet address is available and a mobile phone is connec- ted to the multimedia system via Blue- tooth (Y page 91) or USB (Y page 150).

Taking an alternate route

If the Calculate Alternative Routes setting is activated O, different routes will be offered each time a route is calculated (Y page 54). You can call up alternative routes to the current route.

74 Route guidance Na

vi ga tio

n

Route 1 is calculated with the current settings for the route type and route options and shown with a dark blue line. Routes 2 and 3 are alternatives to route 1 and also displayed with a dark blue line. Route 4 is the most economic route and is dis- played with a green line. X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show the menu: slide6 the controller. X To select Route, turn and press the controller. X Select Alternative Route. Route 1 is shown.

X To display additional routes: select Next orPrev.. X To start a new route guidance: select Start.

Route list

X To switch to navigation mode: press the button.

X To show the menu: slide6 the controller. X To select Route, turn and press the controller. X Select Route List. The route list shows the next change of direc- tion and the immediate distances from the current vehicle position.

X To display additional route sections: turn the controller. The position of the change of direction that belongs to the respective route section is indicated on the map with a direction arrow.

Where am I?

X To switch to navigation mode: press the button.

X To show the menu: slide6 the controller. X To select Position, turn and press the con- troller.

X Select Where am I?. The street you are currently on and the pre- vious and next intersections are displayed.

Traffic jam function

X To switch to navigation mode: press the button.

X To show the menu: slide6 the controller. X To select Route, turn and press the controller. X Select Detour. X To specify the start of the traffic jam sec- tion: select Beginning. The next possible traffic jam section starting point is marked.

X Turn the controller. The marking moves along the route to the next starting position.

X Press the controller. The start of the traffic jam is set.

Route guidance 75

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

X To specify the end of a traffic jam section: select End. The next possible traffic jam section end point is marked.

X Turn the controller. The marking moves along the route to the next end position.

X Press the controller. The end of the traffic jam is determined.

X To calculate the detour: select Start.

Off-road

General notes The multimedia system may guide you to off- road routes that your vehicle cannot drive on without causing damage to the tires andwheels, or the vehicle itself. It is the drivers sole respon- sibility to determine the suitability of the route. The state and navigability of off-road routesmay be influenced, for example, by factors such as time of day, time of year and current weather conditions. The multimedia system cannot judge these factors or take them into account for route guidance.

Route guidance to an off-road destina- tion The multimedia system can guide you to desti- nations which are within the area of the digital map, but which are not themselves on the map. These destinations are known as off-road des- tinations, which you can enter using themap, for example. In these cases, the multimedia system guides you for as long as possible with naviga- tion announcements and displays on roads known to the system. If the vehicle reaches an areawhich is not part of the digital map, the display appears as a split- screen view. On the right, an arrow appears that points to the off-road destination. You hear the announcement: "Please follow the arrow on the display". As the vehicle approaches the desti- nation, you will see a display to this effect.

Route guidance from an off-road loca- tion to a destination Off-road location: the vehicle's position is on the digital map, but the map does not contain any information about that location. The multimedia

system is able to guide you to a destination even from an off-road location. At the start of route guidance, you will see theRoad Not Mapped message, an arrow and the distance to the destination. The arrow shows the compass heading to the actual destination. As soon as the vehicle is back on a road known to the system, route guidance continues in the usual way.

Off-road during route guidance Due to road construction, for example, there may be differences between the data on the digital map and the actual course of the road. In such cases, the system will temporarily be unable to locate the vehicle position on the dig- ital map. The vehicle is therefore in an off-road position. In the display, you will then see the Road NotMapped message, an arrow and the distance to the destination. The direction arrow shows the compass heading to the destination. As soon as the system can assign the vehicle position to the map again, route guidance con- tinues in the usual way.

Real-time traffic reports

Requirements In order to receive real-time traffic reports via satellite radio, you need to subscribe to SIRIUS XM Satellite Radio Traffic Message Service. Further information on satellite radio (Y page 131). The multimedia system can receive traffic reports via satellite radio and take account of these for route guidance in the navigation sys- tem. Received traffic reports are displayed on the map either as text or as symbols.

76 Real-time traffic reports Na

vi ga tio

n

Real-time traffic reports on the map

Traffic reports are shown on the map with sym- bols and colored lines. The symbols indicate the type of traffic report and the colored lines show the extent of the area affected by the traffic incident. The symbols are shown in map scales from 1/32 miles (20 m) to 10 miles (10 km). When: is displayed, traffic reports can be received or traffic reports are available. If it is not displayed, no reception is possible. X To hide the menu: slide5 and press the controller. The map can be seen in the full-screen dis- play.

X To set the map scale: turn the controller until the desired map scale is selected. The legend shows the symbolic traffic mes- sages on the map.

: Traffic jam on the route ; Slow-moving traffic on the route = Road blocked ? Traffic jam A Traffic warning B Dashed red and white line delimiting the

traffic warning C Road block (red crosses along the affected

road)

D Slow-moving traffic (orange line along the affected route)

E Traffic jam (red line along the affected route)

Displaying real-time traffic reports

Starting a search for traffic reports

X To switch to navigation mode: press the button.

X To show the menu: slide6 the controller. X To select Traffic: turn and press the con- troller.

X To close the report: press the controller.

Traffic symbol information

: Affected roads with indication of direction ; Symbol for report type, e.g. traffic flow mes-

sage X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show the menu: slide6 the controller. X To select Traffic: turn and press the con- troller.

Real-time traffic reports 77

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

X To select Traffic Symbol Information: turn and press the controller. The map appears and shows the available traffic information as icons. The first traffic information is highlighted.

X To highlight additional traffic symbols, selectNext or Previous. X To move the map: select Map. You can move the map to enable further traf- fic information to be displayed.

You can have the traffic report relevant to a traf- fic icon shown. X To select Details: turn and press the con- troller.

The report shows the following information: RState/province, road and display of the affec- ted direction RSection of the road to which the traffic report applies RTraffic icon and traffic report X To close the detailed display: press the % button.

Displaying reports on the route

The function is only available while route guid- ance is active. It shows the available traffic reports affecting the current route.

If there are no reports for the route or the func- tion is not supported in the selected language: the Messages On Routemenu item is gray and cannot be selected. X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show the menu: slide6 the controller. X To select Traffic: turn and press the con- troller.

X To select Messages On Route: turn and press the controller. The traffic report window appears. Several traffic reports may be available for the calcu- lated route, marked for example by 1/4. The report shows the following information: RState/province, road and display of the affected direction RSection of the road to which the traffic report applies RTraffic icon and traffic report

X To display the next/previous traffic report: turn the controller.

X To close the display: press the% button.

Displaying all traffic reports

X To switch to navigation mode: press the button.

X To show the menu: slide6 the controller. X To select Traffic: turn and press the con- troller.

X To select All Messages: turn and press the controller. A list is shown containing all roads, areas or regions affected by traffic reports. Roads, areas or regions not on the route also appear in the list.

78 Real-time traffic reports Na

vi ga tio

n

X To select the road, area or region: turn the controller and press to confirm. The traffic report is displayed (Y page 78). There may be several traffic reports for the affected road.

X To close the display: press the% button.

Activating/deactivating traffic informa- tion on the map You can switch the following traffic information on the map on/off: RIncidents RSpeed & Flow RFree Flow X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show the menu: slide6 the controller. X To select Traffic: turn and press the con- troller.

X To select Traffic Information On Map: turn and press the controller.

X Select Incidents, Map with UncongestedRoads or Free Flow. The display is on O or off .

Reading out traffic reports on the route

Introduction The text reader function is only available while route guidance is active. It reads out traffic reports affecting the current route. You can select from the following text reader properties: RLanguage (Y page 41) RText reader speed (Y page 37) You can start the text reader function manually or set it to automatic.

Starting the text reader function man- ually X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show the menu: slide6 the controller. X To select Traffic: turn and press the con- troller.

X Select Read Out All Messages on Route. The multimedia system reads out the reports in sequential order. If there are no reports for the route, the ReadOut All Messages on Route menu item is gray and cannot be selected.

X To cancel the read-aloud function: selectCancel Read-Aloud Function. The multimedia system reads the current report aloud and then exits the read-aloud function.

Automatic text reader function X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show the menu: slide6 the controller. X To select Traffic: turn and press the con- troller.

X Select Read Messages Automatically. Depending on the previous state, switch the option on O or off .

Recalculating the route dynamically Route types Dynamic Traffic Route andDynamic TRF. Route After Request take into account all of the traffic reports they receive for the current route when calculating the route (Y page 54). If you have selected Dynamic Traffic Route as the route type, the multimedia system guides you to your destination along the updated route. If you have selected the route type DynamicTRF. Route After Request, a promptwill first appear. You can now decide whether to: Raccept the detour proposed by the multime- dia system or Rcontinue along the original route X To accept the proposed detour: press the controller.

X To reject the proposed detour and continue with the original route: turn the controller and press to confirm. The original route is continued.

Real-time traffic reports 79

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

Storing destinations

General notes In the "Last destinations" memory, the following are stored: Rdestinations and intermediate destinations according to the route calculation Rthe current vehicle position or the crosshair position, if these are saved Rpersonal routes If the memory is full, the oldest destination is overwritten. You can save destinations permanently in the address book (Y page 80) and on an SD card (Y page 80). For instance, this is possible immediately after entering an address. For further information on the address book, see (Y page 102)

Storing the destination in the address book

Storing as a new contact

The example shows a POI. X To select Save: turn and press the controller. A menu appears.

X Select As New Address Book Entry. X Select Not Classified, Home or Work. An input menu shows the destination address.

X Enter a surname and first name. Character entry (Y page 29).

X To select OK: turn and press the controller. The Saving Successful message appears. The destination address is saved in the address book as a navigable contact.

Adding to a contact

The example shows a POI. Requirement: the address book contains con- tacts. X To select Save: turn and press the controller. A menu appears.

X Select Add to Address Book Entry. X Select Not Classified, Home or Work. The address book appears.

X Search for a contact (Y page 103). X Press the controller. The Saving Successful message appears. The destination address is allocated to a con- tact in the address book. Telephone numbers are not transferred to the telephone number fields of the address book. After selecting the destination address from the address book for navigation, the associ- ated telephone number will be displayed. If the contact already has two destination addresses, a prompt will appear asking if a destination address should be overwritten.

X Select Yes or No. If you select Yes, a list showing both destina- tion addresses appears.

X To select the destination address: turn and press the controller. The destination address is overwritten.

Saving a destination to an SD card X Insert the SD memory card (Y page 141). X Display a POI, for example. X To select Save: turn and press the controller. A menu appears.

X Select To Memory Card.

80 Storing destinations Na

vi ga tio

n

X Select Not Classified or, if available, select a category that you have created yourself. An input menu appears.

X Enter a surname and first name. Character entry (Y page 30).

X Select OK. The Saving Successful message appears. The destination is saved to the SD card.

Saving the current vehicle position

Using the map X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X When the map is shown, press and hold the COMAND controller until you hear a tone. The current vehicle position is saved to the "Last destinations" memory. If an SD card is inserted, the current vehicle position will also be saved in the Not Classified category.

Using the menu X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show the menu: slide6 the controller. X To select Position: turn and press the con- troller.

X Select Save. X Store the destination in the address book (Y page 80).

X Save the destination to the SD card (Y page 80).

Saving the crosshair position X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To display the crosshair: press the control- ler.

X Move the map to the desired position (Y page 53).

X To show the menu: press the controller.

X To select Position: turn and press the con- troller.

X Select Save. The current crosshair position is saved to the "Last destinations" memory. If an SD card is inserted, the current crosshair position will also be saved in the Not Classified category.

Editing the last destinations

X To switch to navigation mode: press the button.

X To show the menu: slide6 the controller. X To select Destination: turn and press the controller.

X Select From Last Destinations. The "Last destinations" memory appears.

X To save the destination: select the destina- tion. The destination address appears.

X Store the destination in the address book (Y page 80).

X Save the destination to the SD card (Y page 80).

X To view the details: while in the "Last desti- nations" memory, turn the controller and highlight the entry.

X Slide9 the controller. A menu appears.

X To select Details: press the controller. i The destination address can be changed if desired.

X To delete one or all destinations: while in the "Last destinations" memory, turn the con- troller and highlight the entry.

X Slide9 the controller. A menu appears.

Storing destinations 81

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

X To select Delete or Delete All: turn and press the controller. A prompt appears.

X Select Yes or No. Selecting Yes deletes the selected destina- tion or all destinations.

Map functions

General notes Company logos displayed on the map are trade- marks of the respective companies and used solely for the purpose of indicating the locations of these companies. The use of such logos on the map does not indicate approval of, support of or advertising by these companies for the navigation system itself.

Map settings

Setting the map scale

Requirement: themap is in full screenmode, the menu is faded out (Y page 53). The lower left-hand section of the map shows the currently set map scale and compass nee- dle. Right-hand-drive vehicles: the currently set map scale and compass needle are displayed in the lower right-hand section of the map. X To show the map in full screen mode: to hide the menu, push the% button.

or X Slide the controller to the center of the map and press to confirm.

X To set themapscale: as soon as you turn the controller, the scale bar appears on the bot- tom of the display.

X Turn the controller until the needle points to the desired map scale. Once you are finished selecting a map scale, the new map scale will be shown.

Selecting map orientation

X To switch to navigation mode: press the button.

X To show the menu: slide6 the controller. X To select Options: turn and press the con- troller.

X Select Map Orientation. The # dot indicates the current setting.

X Turn and press the controller. The map orientation is set.

The image is an example of the 3D map display with crosshair.

82 Map functions Na

vi ga tio

n

Change map direc- tion

Explanation

North Up 0 The map view is displayed so that north is always up.

Heading Up The map view is aligned to the direction of travel. The direction of travel is always at the top; the red tip of the sym- bol points north.

3-D Map The map view is aligned to the direction of travel. The map displays a 3D oblique view with elevation; the red tip of the symbol points north.

Selecting POI symbols on the map

POIs can be displayed as symbols in the map display. POIs include, for example, gas stations, hotels and restaurants. X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show the menu: slide6 the controller. X To select Options: turn and press the con- troller.

X Select Map Content. X Select POI Symbols On Map. The # dot indicates the current setting.

X Turn and press the controller.Default Symbols shows symbols of prede- fined categories in the map. Custom Symbols allows symbols to be selec- ted from other/all available categories.

X Turn and press the controller. You have the option of selecting symbols to be displayed O or not displayed on the map.

The list shows all symbols that are contained on the digital map across all countries. However, not all points of interest are available in all coun- tries. As a result, certain point of interest sym- bols may not be displayed on the map, even if the symbol display is switched on.

Selecting text information on the map At the bottom of the display, you can specify whether to display geo-coordinates or not to display text information for the street you are currently on. X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show the menu: slide6 the controller. X To select Options: turn and press the con- troller.

X Select Map Content. X Select Text Information On Map. The # dot indicates the current setting.

X Turn and press the controller.Current Street shows the current street at the bottom of the display. Geo-coordinates shows the longitude and latitude, elevation and number of satellites received. The elevation shown may deviate from the actual elevation.

X Turn and press the controller.

Displaying the range on the map The range can be displayed on the map for elec- tric vehicles. A circle appears around the current vehicle position. For further information on range, see the vehicle Operator's Manual. X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show the menu: slide6 the controller. X To select Options: turn and press the con- troller.

X Select Map Content. X Select Range on Map. Switch the display in the map on O or off .

Map functions 83

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

Switching highway information on/off While driving on the highway, gas stations, rest stops, rest areas and highway exits are dis- played along with their immediate distances from the current vehicle position (Y page 72). X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show the menu: slide6 the controller. X To select Options: turn and press the con- troller.

X Select Map Content. X Select Highway Information. Switch the display in the map on O or off .

Traffic Sign Assist The function is available depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle. The map shows traffic signs detected by Traffic Sign Assist (see the vehicle Operator's Manual). X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show the menu: slide6 the controller. X To select Options: turn and press the con- troller.

X Select Map Content. X Select Traffic Sign Assist. Switch the display in the map on O or off .

Displaying the next crossroads If route guidance is not active, the next cross- roads can be displayed at the upper edge of the display. X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show the menu: slide6 the controller. X To select Options: turn and press the con- troller.

X Select Map Content. X Select Next Intersecting Street. Switch the display in the map on O or off .

Showing the map version X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show the menu: slide6 the controller.

X To select Options: turn and press the con- troller.

X Select Map Content. X Select Map Version. Information on the current map version is shown. Information about new versions of the digital map can be obtained from an author- ized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Rotating the 3D map

You can use this function to explore the vicinity of the destination in a 3D view. The function is available in all map scales. X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show the menu: slide6 the controller. X To select Position: turn and press the con- troller.

X Select 3D Map Rotation. X Turn the controller to change to the 3D map perspective.

Additional functions: RMoving the map (Y page 53)

84 Map functions Na

vi ga tio

n

Map display

Displaying the navigation map

The multimedia system shows the navigation map in globe projection. This allows for a real- istic map display free from distortion in all map scales. Satellite maps are shown in map scales from 2 miles to 1000 miles. Other functions: RMoving the map (Y page 53) RChanging the map scale (Y page 82)

Building images

In small map scales (1/32 mile, 1/16 mile), important buildings are depicted realistically on the map. Other buildings are shown as models.

Avoiding an area

General notes The multimedia system enables you to avoid areas you do not wish to drive through. If you activate or deactivate a route block while route guidance is active, the multimedia system will calculate a new route. If you activate or

deactivate a route block while route guidance is inactive, themultimedia systemwill use the new setting for the next route guidance. The calculated route may include an area to be avoided if: Ryour destination is located in such an area Rthere is no alternative route available Highwayswithin blocked areas are always taken into consideration in the route calculation.

Avoiding a new area

X To switch to navigation mode: press the button.

X To show the menu: slide6 the controller. X To select Options: turn and press the con- troller.

X Select Route Settings. X Select Avoid Options. X Select Avoid Area. X Select Avoid New Area. A menu appears.

X Select Using Map or Address Entry. If you select Using Map, the map with cross- hair appears. If you select Address Entry, the address entry menu appears where you can enter the address (Y page 56). The map appears with the crosshair after the address is entered.

Map functions 85

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

X To select an area: when the map with cross- hair appears, press the controller. A red square appears on themap, symbolizing the area to be blocked.

X To change the size of the area: turn the controller. The map scale is shown at the bottom of the display. The needle points to the map scale currently selected.

X When the desired size is set, press the con- troller. The area is entered into the list.

Turning an area on/off and displaying/ changing the area

X To switch to navigation mode: press the button.

X To show the menu: slide6 the controller. X To select Options: turn and press the con- troller.

X Select Route Settings. X Select Avoid Options. X Select Avoid Area. A list appears.

X To switch an area to avoid on/off: select an area to mark by turning and pressing the con- troller. The area will be avoided O or not .

X Todisplay/change an area:mark an area by turning the controller.

X Slide9 the controller. X To select Display/Change: press the con- troller. The map with the crosshair appears. The area currently blocked is displayed as a red square.

X To move the area to a new location: slide 1,4,2 the controller.

X To change the size of the area, press the con- troller.

X Turn the controller. X To apply the changes, press the controller. A message appears stating that the area has been set.

Deleting one/all areas X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show the menu: slide6 the controller. X To select Options: turn and press the con- troller.

X Select Route Settings. X Select Avoid Options. X Select Avoid Area. A list appears.

X To delete an area: mark an area by turning the controller.

X Slide9 the controller. X Select Delete or Delete All. A prompt appears asking whether you wish to delete the area.

X Select Yes or No. After selecting Yes, the area is deleted.

X To delete all areas: when the list appears, slide9 the controller.

X Select Delete All. A prompt appears asking whether you wish to delete all areas.

X Select Yes or No. After selecting Yes, all areas are deleted.

86 Map functions Na

vi ga tio

n

SIRIUS XM service

Displaying SIRIUS XM service informa- tion You can display the SIRIUS XM service informa- tion. X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show the menu: slide6 the controller. X To select Traffic: turn and press the con- troller.

X Select SIRIUS Service. The provider's phone number (SIRIUS XM) and the serial number of your service module are displayed.

Registering the SIRIUS XM service X Call the provider telephone number shown on the multimedia system display. i You can also have the satellite service acti- vated online. To do so, visit the SIRIUS XM Radio website at http://www.sirius.com (USA).

Once the connection has been established: X Follow the service employee's instructions. The activation process may take up to ten minutes.

If registration is not included when purchasing the system, your credit card details will be required to activate your account.

Updating the digital map

Introduction The digital maps generated by themap software become outdated in the same way as conven- tional road maps. Optimal route guidance can only be provided by the navigation system in conjunction with the most up-to-date map soft- ware. Information about new versions of the digital map can be obtained from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. You can have the digital map updated there using a data medium, or you can update it yourself.

Carrying out a manual update You can carry out the update yourself. The update process may take some time (up to 45minutes), depending on the size of the digital map. The update will be completedmore quickly if the vehicle is stationary. If you begin the update while the vehicle is stationary and the starter battery has insufficient power, the mul- timedia system may switch off automatically. This protects the battery. In order to prevent this, a suitable power supply to the vehicle must be maintained.

Navigation functions

Calling up the navigation system menu

X To switch to navigation mode: press the button.

X To show the menu: slide5 the controller. Navi is highlighted in the main function bar.

X Press the controller. The navigation menu appears.

X Turn the controller to display the navigation functions one after another.

X To switch to the map, turn the controller untilNavigation appears and press the control- ler.

Calling up the online map display Online search requirement (USA): mbrace must be activated for Internet access (Y page 122). X Call up the navigation menu (Y page 87). X Turn the controller until Online Map Display is brought to the front.

Navigation functions 87

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

X Press the controller. The online connection is established. Once the connection is established, themap shows the vicinity of the current vehicle position.

X To exit the online map display: press the % button.

Calling up the compass display X Call up the navigation menu (Y page 87). X Turn the controller until Compass is brought to the front.

X Press the controller. The compass display provides the following information: RThe current direction of travel with bearing (360 degree format) and compass direction RLongitude and latitude coordinates in degrees, minutes and seconds RHeight (rounded off) above sea level RNumber of GPS satellites from which a sig- nal can be received

X To select Compass On Map: turn and press the controller.

X To exit the compass display: press the % button.

Info on navigation

X Call up the navigation menu (Y page 87). X Turn the controller until Info on Navigation is brought to the front. X Press the controller. The Digital Operator's Manual is opened at the section on navigation.

Problems with the navigation system

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The multimedia system does not resume route guidance after the jour- ney has been interrup- ted.

Route guidance is canceled if you interrupt the journey for more than two hours. "Interrupting the journey" refers to stopping the vehicle. "Continuing route guidance" refers to switching the multimedia sys- tem back on and driving on. X Continue route guidance manually (Y page 74).

88 Problems with the navigation system Na

vi ga tio

n

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The multimedia system is unable to determine the vehicle's position.

Themultimedia systemmust identify the vehicles position again after it has been transported. Example: RAfter transporting the vehicle by ferry RAfter transporting the vehicle by motorail X Start the vehicle and pull away. Themultimedia systemcalculates the vehicle's position. Depending on the driving situation, this may take some time. Route guidance may be restricted during the determination of the vehicle's position. When positioning is complete, route guidance is resumed with nav- igation announcements and route guidance displays.

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The digital map is not compatible with the vehicle software.

The data medium containing the digital map cannot be used for the update. X To confirm the message: press the controller. X Remove the data medium. X Have the data medium checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The multimedia system asks for an activation code during the map update.

The digital map is secured with an activation code. X Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The map software update has failed.

The digital map can be installed with a DVD, SD card or USB stick. X Check the readability of the data medium, e.g. in a PC. X To restart the update: insert the DVD. or X Insert an SD card or USB stick.

The multimedia system asks for an activation code during the map update. The code must be validated in the vehicle. X Start the vehicle. X To restart the update: insert the DVD, SD card or connect a USB device.

The multimedia system's integral hard disk has been physically dam- aged. X Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Problems with the navigation system 89

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

Your multimedia system equipment

These operating instructions describe all the standard and optional equipment of your multi- media system, as available at the time of going to press. Country-specific differences are pos- sible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not feature all functions described here. This also applies to safety-relevant systems and func- tions. Read the information on qualified specialist workshops in the vehicle Operator's Manual.

Important safety notes

G WARNING If you operate mobile communication equip- ment when driving, you may be distracted from the traffic situation. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate this equipment when the vehicle is stationary.

If you make a call on your mobile phone while driving, always use hands-free mode. Only use themobile phonewhen road,weather and traffic conditions permit. Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a mobile phone while driv- ing a vehicle. Bear in mind that at a speed of 30 mph (approx- imately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers a distance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) per second. Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiation may cause damage to your health and the health of others. There is scientific discussion surrounding the possible health risks posed by electromagnetic fields. You can reduce this risk by using an exte- rior antenna. Therefore, connect your mobile communica- tions equipment to the vehicle's exterior antenna wherever possible.

General notes

Telephony The Bluetooth interface on themultimedia sys- tem is available for telephony. If your mobile phone supports the Bluetooth profile PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile), the contacts are automatically displayed in the mul- timedia system. You can use the text message and e-mail func- tions if your mobile phone supports the MAP Bluetooth profile (Message Access Profile). Observe the other requirements for the e-mail and text message functions (Y page 111). With a suitable mobile phone, you can use the hands-free system and receive vCards via the Bluetooth interface. You can obtain more information about suitable mobile phones on the Internet at http://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect. You can also obtain more information by calling. In the USA, you can get in touch with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372). In Canada, you can get in touch with the Cus- tomer Relations Center on 1-800-387-0100.

Call disconnectionwhile the vehicle is in motion A call may be disconnected if: Rthere is insufficient network coverage in cer- tain areas. Ryoumove from one transmitter/receiver area (cell) into another and no channels are free. Ryou use a SIM card which is not compatible with the network available.

Operating options You can operate the telephone by: Rusing the controller: turning sliding1 or4

90 General notes Te le ph on e

pressing Rusing the6 or~ button on the multi- function steering wheel Rusing the Voice Control System (see the sep- arate operating instructions)

Function restrictions You may have to wait to use telephony via the multimedia system in the following situations: Rthe mobile phone is switched off RBluetooth is switched off on the mobile phone Rthe mobile phone has not logged on to a mobile phone network Rif the Bluetooth function is switched off in the multimedia system

The telephone automatically tries to log on to a network. If no network is available, you may not be able to make a "911" emergency call. If you attempt to make an outgoing call, the No Service message will appear for a short while.

Telephone menu overview

: Mobile phone network provider ; Signal strength of themobile phone network = Receiver icon or ? Telephone menu character bar A Bluetooth device name of the currently

connected mobile phone B Displays the phone book Symbols: to= andA are not shown until after a mobile phone has been connected to the multimedia system. The symbols depend on your mobile phone and your mobile phone net- work provider. Further information on connect- ing a mobile phone (Y page 91).

Symbol; shows the current signal strength of the mobile phone network. If all bars are filled, you have optimum reception. If no bars are shown, reception is either very poor or there is none at all. Receiver icon shows whether a call is active/ being connected or not. Calling up the telephone menu X Press %. Showing the menu bar X Slide6 the controller. If the mobile phone connected supports the MAP Bluetooth profile (Message Access Profile), the 1 menu item is available. Further information on text messages and e-mail (Y page 111). If you have an unread text message or e-mail, the 0 mail symbol is displayed in the status bar. The symbol disappears once you have read the text message or e-mail. The symbol is displayed as soon as the message memory on the connected mobile phone is full. The symbol disappears once you delete at least one mes- sage.

Connecting/disconnecting a mobile phone

Requirements For telephony via the Bluetooth interface, you require a Bluetooth-capablemobile phone. The mobile phone must support Hands-Free Profile 1.0 or above. On the multimedia system X Activate Bluetooth (Y page 41). On the mobile phone X Switch on themobile phone and enter the PIN when prompted to do so (see the manufac- turer's operating instructions).

X Activate Bluetooth and, if necessary, Blue- tooth visibility for other devices (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). This visibility is for restricted periods of time on some mobile phones (see the manufactur- er's operating instructions).

X Set the Bluetooth device name for the mobile phone if necessary.

Connecting/disconnecting a mobile phone 91

Te le ph on e

Z

The device names for all of one manufacturer's products might be identical. To make it possible to clearly identify your mobile phone, change the device name (see the manufacturer's oper- ating instructions). The name can be freely selected. If the mobile phone supports the PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) and MAP (Message Access Profile) Bluetooth profiles, the follow- ing information will be transmitted after you connect: RPhone book RCall lists RText messages and e-mail Further information on allowing or suppressing the automatic download of the phone book (Y page 107). The battery of the mobile phone should always be kept sufficiently charged in order to prevent malfunctions.

i Not all mobile phones available on the mar- ket are equally suitable. You can obtain fur- ther information about suitable mobile phones and about the connection between the mobile phone and the multimedia system on the Internet at http://www.mercedes- benz.com/connect. You can also obtain more information by call- ing. In the USA, you can get in touch with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372). In Canada, you can get in touch with the Cus- tomer Relations Center on 1-800-387-0100.

i Some displays (e.g. the signal strength) are shown depending on the supported version of the Hands-Free Profile.

Procedure and general information

Authorizing a mobile phone (connect- ing) Before using your mobile phone with the multi- media system for the first time, you will need to search for the phone (Y page 92) and then authorize it (Y page 93). Depending on the mobile phone, authorization either takes place by means of Secure Simple Pairing or by enter- ing a passkey. The multimedia system automat-

ically makes the procedure that is relevant for your mobile phone available. You can recognize Secure Simple Pairing by the fact that a code is displayed on the mobile phone and on the mul- timedia system. You can recognize the passkey system by the fact that you have to enter a code on the mobile phone and on the multimedia sys- tem. The mobile phone is connected automati- cally after authorization. Further information about automatically reconnecting authorized mobile phones (Y page 94). If the multimedia system does not detect your mobile phone, this may be due to particular security settings on your mobile phone. You can also start the search procedure and authoriza- tion on the mobile phone (Y page 94). Device-specific information on authorizing and connecting Bluetooth-capable mobile phones can be obtained from an authorized Mercedes- Benz Center or via the Internet at http:// www.mercedes-benz.com/connect. You can authorize up to 15mobile phones. After authorization, the connection of the last two tel- ephones used always functions automatically. For telephony, only one mobile phone can be connected to the multimedia system at any one time.

De-authorizing (disconnecting) amobile phone The connection is terminated automatically if you leave the receiver range of the multimedia system or deactivate Bluetooth on your mobile phone. If you no longer want the Bluetooth connection to be established automatically, the mobile phone must be de-authorized (disconnected) (Y page 95).

Searching for a mobile phone X To call up the telephone menu: press the

% button. X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select Conn. Device: turn and press the controller. The device list is displayed.

92 Connecting/disconnecting a mobile phone Te le ph on e

X To select Search for Phones: turn and press the controller. A message is displayed that Bluetooth must be activated on themobile phone andmust be made visible to other devices.

X To select Start Search: press the controller. The available mobile phones are displayed in the device list.

The duration of the search depends on the num- ber of Bluetooth telephones within range and their characteristics. If a new phone is found, it appears in the device list with the symbol. You can now author- ize (connect) the mobile phone found (Y page 93). If themaximum number of authorized devices in the device list is reached, you will be requested to de-authorize a mobile phone (Y page 95). When you call up the device list again, de- authorized devices will be removed from the list. To update the device list, start the search again. Symbols in the device list

Sym- bol

Explanation

New mobile phone found, not yet authorized.

Mobile phone is authorized, but is not connected.

# Mobile phone is authorized and connected.

Authorizing a mobile phone (connect- ing)

Authorization via Secure Simple Pairing If the multimedia system has found your mobile phone, you can authorize (connect) it. X To select a mobile phone from the device list: turn the controller and press to confirm. A code is displayed in the multimedia system and on the mobile phone.

The code is the same X Multimedia system: select Yes. X Mobile phone: confirm the code. Depending on the mobile phone used, you may have to confirm the connection to themultimedia sys- tem and for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth

profiles separately. You may also save the confirmation on the mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). The mobile phone is now authorized and con- nected to the multimedia system. You can now speak using the hands-free system.

To ensure an optimum language quality, you can set the mobile phone's transmission and recep- tion volume (Y page 95). The code is different X Multimedia system: select No. The process is canceled. Repeat the authori- zation.

Authorization via passkey entry (access code) If the multimedia system has found your mobile phone, you can authorize (connect) it. X To select a mobile phone from the device list: turn the controller and press to confirm. The input menu for the passkey is displayed. The passkey is a one- to sixteen-digit number combination which you can choose yourself. Depending on the mobile phone used, you may have to enter a number sequence of four digits or more.

X Multimedia system: enter the passkey using the character bar.

X Select once all the numbers have been entered.

X Mobile phone: enter the same passkey and confirm your entry. Depending on the mobile phone used, you may have to confirm the connection to the multimedia system and for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth profiles sepa- rately. You may also save the confirmation on the mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). The mobile phone is now authorized and con- nected to the multimedia system. You can now speak using the hands-free system.

To ensure an optimum language quality, you can set the mobile phone's transmission and recep- tion volume (Y page 95). If the Authorization Failed message appears, youmay have entered a different pass- key or exceeded the prescribed time limit. Repeat the procedure.

Connecting/disconnecting a mobile phone 93

Te le ph on e

Z

i If you wish to re-authorize the mobile phone after de-authorizing it, you can choose another passkey for it.

i Mercedes-Benz recommends de-authoriza- tion in the multimedia system as well as on the mobile phone (Y page 95). Subsequent authorization may otherwise fail.

Establishing the connection from the mobile phone The Bluetooth device name of the multimedia system is MB Bluetooth. X Multimedia system: call up the telephone menu.

X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select Conn. Device: turn and press the controller. The device list is displayed.

X To select Connect via Phone: turn and press the controller. A message is displayed, stating that you can start the search on your mobile phone.

X Mobile phone: start the search for a Blue- tooth device (see manufacturer's operating instructions). The multimedia system is displayed with the name MB Bluetooth in the mobile phone's device list.

X Select MB Bluetooth. A prompt appears in the multimedia system's display asking if the mobile phone should be authorized.

X Multimedia system: select Yes. If No is selected, the procedure is canceled. If your mobile phone supports Secure Simple Pairing, a code is now displayed on both devi- ces.

The code is the same X Multimedia system: select Yes. X Mobile phone: confirm the code. Depending on the mobile phone used, you may have to confirm the connection to themultimedia sys- tem and for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth profiles separately. You may also save the

confirmation on the mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). The mobile phone is now authorized and con- nected to the multimedia system. You can now speak using the hands-free system. To ensure an optimum language quality, you can set the mobile phone's transmission and reception volume (Y page 95).

The code is different X Multimedia system: select No. The process is canceled. Repeat the proce- dure.

If your mobile phone does not support Secure Simple Pairing, an input menu is displayed for the passkey. The passkey is a one- to sixteen- digit number combinationwhich you can choose yourself. Enter the same passkey in both the multimedia systemandon themobile phone and confirm. Depending on the mobile phone used, you may have to confirm the connection to the multimedia system and for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth profiles.

Reconnecting automatically The multimedia system always searches for the last connected mobile phone. If no connection can be made to the most recently connected mobile phone, the system searches for the mobile phone that was con- nected before that one.

Switching between mobile phones If you have authorized more than one mobile phone, you can switch between the individual phones. X To call up the telephone menu: press the

% button. X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select Conn. Device: turn and press the controller. The device list is displayed.

X To select the desired mobile phone: turn and press the controller. The selectedmobile phone is connected if it is within Bluetooth range and if Bluetooth is activated.

94 Connecting/disconnecting a mobile phone Te le ph on e

Only one mobile phone can be connected at any one time for telephony. The currently connected mobile phone is indicated by the # dot in the device list.

i You can only switch to another authorized mobile phone if you are not currently making a call.

De-authorizing (disconnecting) a mobile phone Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC recommends de- authorization in the multimedia system as well as on the mobile phone. Subsequent authoriza- tion may otherwise fail. X To call up the telephone menu: press the

% button. X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select Conn. Device: turn and press the controller. The device list is displayed.

X To highlight the desired mobile phone in the device list: turn the controller.

X To selectG: slide9 the controller. X To select Deauthorize: turn and press the controller. A prompt appears, asking whether you really wish to de-authorize this device.

X To select Yes: turn and press the controller. The mobile phone is de-authorized.

Displaying connection details X To call up the telephone menu: press the

% button. X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select Conn. Device: turn and press the controller. The device list is displayed.

X To highlight the desired mobile phone: turn the controller.

X To selectG: slide9 the controller. X To select Details: turn and press the con- troller. The following information concerning the selected mobile phone is shown:

RBluetooth device name RBluetooth address RAuthorization status

Setting the reception and transmis- sion volume

Once the mobile phone has been authorized, you can optimize the transmission and recep- tion volume settings. To find out about the best possible settings for your mobile phone, visit http://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect. You can also obtain more information by calling. In the USA, you can get in touch with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372). In Canada, you can get in touch with the Cus- tomer Relations Center on 1-800-387-0100. X To call up the telephone menu: press the

% button. X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select Conn. Device: turn and press the controller. The device list appears.

X To highlight the desired mobile phone in the device list: turn the controller.

X To selectG: slide9 the controller. X To select Reception Volume or Transmission Volume: turn and press the controller. X To set the volume: turn the controller. X To accept changes: press the controller.

i Incorrect settings may have an impact on the quality of calls.

Using the telephone

Accepting a call X To selectw Accept: press the controller. or X Press6 on the multifunction steering wheel. The call is accepted.

Additional functions available during a call (Y page 97). Adjusting the call volume (Y page 95).

Using the telephone 95

Te le ph on e

Z

Further information about ending a call (Y page 99).

i If the phone number of the caller is trans- ferred, it appears in the display. If the phone number is saved in the phone book, the con- tact's name and picture are also displayed. If the phone number is not transferred,Unknown is shown in the display.

Rejecting a call X To select= Reject: turn and press the controller.

or X Press~ on the multifunction steering wheel.

Making a call

Using the telephone menu X To call up the telephone menu: press the

% button. X To select the sequence of numbers: turn and press the controller for each number.

X To selectw in the telephone menu: turn and press the controller. The call is made.

Further information about ending a call (Y page 99).

Using the number keypad X To call up the telephone menu: press the

% button. X Enter the number sequence using the number keypad.

X To selectw in the telephone menu: turn and press the controller. The call is made.

Redial number X To call up the telephone menu: press the

% button. X To selectw in the telephone menu: turn and press the controller. The list of outgoing calls is displayed. The most recently dialed number is at the top.

X To select an entry and make a call: turn and press the controller.

For redialing using the multifunction steering wheel (see the vehicle Operator's Manual). Further information about ending a call (Y page 99).

Using call lists X To call up the telephone menu: press the

% button. X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select Call Lists: turn and press the controller.

X To select Calls Received or Calls Dialed: turn and press the controller. The relevant list is displayed.

X To select an entry and make a call: turn and press the controller.

Selecting and placing a call using the multifunc- tion steeringwheel (see vehicle Operator'sMan- ual) Further information about ending a call (Y page 99).

Using the phone book X To call up the telephone menu: press the

% button. X To select the symbol in the telephone menu: turn and press the controller.

X Search for and call a contact (Y page 100). Selecting and placing a call using the multifunc- tion steeringwheel (see vehicle Operator'sMan- ual) Further information about ending a call (Y page 99).

96 Using the telephone Te le ph on e

Using speed dial Option 1 X To call up the telephone menu: press the

% button. X To highlight a number from the character bar: turn the controller.

X Press the controller for longer than two sec- onds. The telephone menu displays the selected entry. The number is dialed.

Option 2 X To call up the telephone menu: press the

% button. X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select Call Lists: turn and press the controller.

X To select Speed Dial Preset List: turn and press the controller. The speed dial list is displayed.

X To select an entry and make a call: turn and press the controller. The telephone menu displays the selected entry. The number is dialed.

Further information on setting up speed dial (Y page 111). Further information about ending a call (Y page 99).

Functions available during a call

Overview

: Adds a call (Y page 97) ; Person you are calling = Symbol for active telephone connection ? Ends a call

A Switches the microphone on/off (Y page 97)

B Sends DTMF tones (not possible with all mobile phones) (Y page 98)

Other functions: RAccepting a waiting call (Y page 98) RCall waiting (Y page 98) RConducting a conference call (Y page 98) Availability depends on the network (only pos- sible on GSM networks) and the Bluetooth mobile phone.

Adding a call

: Adds a call If the mobile phone network provider and the mobile phone support the function, you can make another call during an existing call. The previously active call is held. X To select2: turn and press the controller. X To make a call, e.g.: RUsing the telephone menu (Y page 96) RUsing redial (Y page 96) RUsing the call lists (Y page 96) RUsing the phone book (Y page 96) RUsing speed dial (Y page 97)

Switching the microphone on or off This function is available in the telephone menu during an active phone call.

Using the telephone 97

Te le ph on e

Z

Switching off the microphone: X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select Microphone Off: turn and press the controller. If the microphone is switched off, theQ symbol and the The microphone is off. message are displayed.

Switching on the microphone: X Select Microphone On. TheQ symbol disappears. The The microphone is on. message is shown.

Sending DTMF tones This function is not supported by all mobile phones. Answering machines or other devices can be controlled by DTMF tones, e.g. for remote query functions. X If you would like to listen to the messages on your answeringmachine, for example, dial the corresponding number.

Transmitting individual characters X Once a connection has been established to the answer phone, select the desired charac- ters in the telephonemenu: turn and press the controller each time.

or X Press the corresponding key on the number keypad. Every character selected will be transmitted immediately.

Calls with several participants

Switching between calls (call waiting) If you make another call, you can switch between the two calls (call waiting). This func- tion depends on your mobile phone network provider and the mobile phone (see the manu- facturer's operating instructions). The calls are marked 1 and 2. The active call is highlighted.

Switching between the calls X Press6 on the multifunction steering wheel.

or X To select1 or2: turn and press the con- troller. The selected call is active. The other call is on hold.

Ending the active call X To select= in the telephone menu: turn and press the controller.

or X Press~ on the multifunction steering wheel. The other call is still on hold.

X To activate the call on hold: selectwResume . The call on hold is activated. If you select = Hang Up , the call on hold is also ended. i On some mobile phones, the call on hold is activated as soon as the active call is ended.

Conference call This function depends on your mobile phone network provider and the mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). You can interconnect active and held calls. This permits several parties to hear one another and speak with one another. X Add a call (Y page 97). or X Answer an incoming call (Y page 98). X To select Conference in the telephonemenu: turn and press the controller. The new participant is included in the confer- ence call. Conference Call is displayed in the telephone menu.

Incoming call during an existing call (call waiting) The call waiting function depends on your mobile phone network provider and your mobile phone. Depending on the mobile phone used, behavior when answering a call may vary (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). Call waiting: if you receive a call while already in a call, a message is shown. You also hear a

98 Using the telephone Te le ph on e

tone. You can decidewhether to accept or reject the call. Accepting X To selectw Accept: press the controller. or X Press6 on the multifunction steering wheel. The incoming call is active. Depending on the mobile phone used, the call which was previ- ously active is put on hold or ended (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). If the call is on hold, you can switch back and forth between the two calls (call waiting) (Y page 98). i Depending on the mobile phone, you may also be able to accept the incoming call (call waiting) on your mobile phone. This function and behavior depends on your mobile phone network provider and the mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).

Rejecting X To select= Reject: turn and press the controller.

or X Press~ on the multifunction steering wheel. The behavior after the call is rejected depends on your mobile phone and mobile phone net- work provider. Option 1: The originally active call is ended and the incoming call is accepted. Option 2: Both calls are ended.

Ending an active call X To select= in the telephone menu: turn and press the controller.

or X Press~ on the multifunction steering wheel. The active call is ended.

Mobile phone voice recognition

You can start or end voice recognition on your mobile phone with this function. Further infor- mation on the voice recognition service (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).

Starting the mobile phone voice recognition X Connect the mobile phone to the multimedia system (Y page 91).

X Press and hold the button on the multi- function steering wheel for more than one second. You can now use the mobile phone voice rec- ognition.

Ending the mobile phone voice recognition X Press8 on the multifunction steering wheel. The mobile phone voice recognition is stop- ped.

Phone book

Introduction The phone book displays the contacts from the address book which have a phone number. The phone book of the mobile phone is auto- matically displayed in the multimedia system after the connection is established (default set- ting). You can deactivate automatic calling up (Y page 107). In the telephone book, you can: RCreate new contacts (Y page 101) RAdd information to contacts (Y page 101) RSearch for contacts (Y page 100) RStore contacts (Y page 102) RDelete contacts (Y page 102) Further information on importing contacts (Y page 107). When you import, save, edit or add contacts, they will be permanently saved in the multime- dia system. These contacts will remain available even when you connect the multimedia system to a different mobile phone. You can view these contacts even without a mobile phone.

Calling up the phone book X To call up the telephone menu: press the

% button. X To select the symbol in the telephone menu: turn and press the controller. If the phone book contains contacts, they will be displayed in alphabetical order. The char- acter bar at the bottomof the display is active.

Phone book 99

Te le ph on e

Z

You can now search for a contact (Y page 100). Further information on the symbols shown (Y page 100).

i You can also call up the phone bookwith the multifunction steering wheel; see the vehicle Operator's Manual.

Symbol overview

Sym- bol

Explanation

Contact that has been entered, edi- ted or saved in the multimedia sys- tem

\ Contact with voice tag These contacts have also been assigned a voice tag. For more infor- mation, see the separate operating instructions.

Contact that was called up from a mobile phone

Contact imported from the SD mem- ory card or USB device

Contact imported via the Bluetooth interface

Searching for a contact

Using the character bar You determine the first letter of the contact you are looking for with the first character you enter. X To select characters: turn the controller and press to confirm. The first contact with the selected first char- acter is highlighted in the phone book. If there are similar contacts, the next different char- acter is shown. For example, with contacts such as Jana and John, the beginnings of the names are identical. The next different char- acter A and O are offered for selection.

X Select the characters of the contact you are searching for one by one, pressing and con- firming with the controller each time.

X To end the search: select . The contacts in the phone book are displayed.

X To highlight a contact: turn the controller. X To call the contact: press the controller. TheG symbol indicates that a contact contains more than one phone number. X To select a contact with theG symbol: turn the controller and press to confirm. The phone numbers are displayed. TheG symbol changes toI.

X To call a telephone number: turn and press the controller.

Back to the character bar X Press the% button repeatedly until the character bar is displayed.

Further information about character entry (Y page 29).

Using the number keypad You determine the first letter of the contact you are looking for with the first character you enter. X For example, to enter the letter C: press the l number key briefly three times in suc- cession. The character appears the first time the key is pressed and shows all the available charac- ters. It switches to the next character each time the key is pressed.

Using the touchpad You determine the first letter of the contact you are looking for with the first character you enter. X Press the touchpad. X Draw the letter on the touchpad surface. The first contact with the selected first char- acter is highlighted in the phone book. Further information on handwriting recogni- tion on the touchpad (Y page 25).

X Draw additional letters on the touchpad sur- face one after another.

X To complete the search and return to the phone book: press the touchpad.

X To select and call the contact: glide up or down and press.

Using the multifunction steering wheel X Dial a number from the phone book; see the vehicle Operator's Manual.

100 Phone book Te le ph on e

Displaying the details of a contact

X Call up the phone book (Y page 99). X Search for and highlight a contact (Y page 100).

X To selectG: slide9 the controller. X To select Details: turn and press the con- troller. The detailed view appears.

Closing the detailed display X To select%: slide8 the controller.

Adding a new contact

X Call up the phone book (Y page 99). X In the phone book, slide5 the controller repeatedly until the character bar disappears.

X To selectG: slide9 the controller. X To select New Entry: turn and press the con- troller.

X To select a category for the number, e.g.Home: turn the controller and press to confirm. X To select a telephone category, e.g. MobilePhone: turn the controller and press to con- firm. If you havemarked a number as preferred, it is shown at the top of the list.

X To select Continue: turn and press the con- troller. The input menu with data fields is displayed.

X Enter characters using the controller (Y page 29) or the number keypad, for exam- ple.

X To finish and save an entry: select . The contact is created in the phone book and in the address book.

Adding information to a contact A maximum of five telephone numbers can be saved for one contact. X Call up the phone book (Y page 99). X Search for and highlight a contact in the phone book (Y page 100).

X To selectG: slide9 the controller. X To select Add Phone No.: turn and press the controller.

X To select a category for the number, e.g.Home: turn the controller and press to confirm. X To select a telephone category, e.g. MobilePhone: turn the controller and press to con- firm. If you havemarked a number as preferred, it is shown at the top of the list.

X To select Continue: turn and press the con- troller. An input line appears.

X Enter the telephone number. X Select . If five numbers are already stored for the con- tact you are searching for, a prompt will appear asking whether you wish to overwrite one of the existing numbers. If you wish to overwrite one of the phone num- bers: X To select Yes: turn and press the controller. A list of the existing five phone numbers is displayed.

X To select the phone number to be overwritten from the list: turn the controller and press to confirm. The entry field for the new phone number is displayed.

X Enter characters using the controller (Y page 29) or the number keypad, for exam- ple.

Phone book 101

Te le ph on e

Z

If you do not wish to overwrite any of the phone numbers: X To select No: turn and press the controller. The process is canceled.

Automatically importing contacts from the mobile phone Depending on the mobile phone used, you can set whether the contacts should be called up automatically after the mobile phone is connec- ted to the multimedia system. X To call up the telephone menu: press the

% button. X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select Options: turn and press the con- troller.

X To select Import Contacts Automatically: press the controller. You can allow O or deactivate the auto- matic download. If the function is deactiva- ted, contacts which have already been called up will continue to be displayed.

If the function is deactivated, the contacts can be called up manually: X To call up the telephone menu: press the

% button. X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select Options: turn and press the con- troller.

X To select Import Contacts: turn and press the controller. The contacts are called up.

Saving a contact Saved contacts are indicated in the phone book by different symbols (Y page 100). X Call up the phone book (Y page 99). X Search for and highlight a contact from the mobile phone d (Y page 100).

X To selectG: slide9 the controller. X To select Save: turn and press the controller. The contact has now been saved. The contact is identified by the symbol in the phone book.

i Saved contacts are also displayed in the address book. Saving or editing the contact data in the mul- timedia system does not change the contacts on the mobile phone. If automatic calling-up of phone contacts is activated, the multime- dia system displays the copy with the changed data.

Deleting a name You can delete contacts that have been added, supplemented, saved or imported in the multi- media system. If there are one or several phone numbers saved under the contact, the contact is deleted from the phone book and the address book. If there are additional entries under the contact, such as a navigable destination, only the phone numbers are deleted. The contact is retained in the address book with the remaining entries. X Call up the phone book (Y page 99). X Search for and highlight a contact in the phone book (Y page 100).

X To selectG: slide9 the controller. X To select Delete: turn and press the control- ler. A prompt appears asking whether the contact should be deleted.

X To select Yes: turn and press the controller. The phone number is deleted.

Closing the phone book X To select& from the character bar: turn the controller and press to confirm.

or X Press the% button.

Address book

Introduction Always pay attention to traffic conditions. Familiarize yourself with the address book func- tions before beginning your journey. You can use the multimedia system when the road and traffic conditions permit. You could

102 Address book Te le ph on e

otherwise become involved in an accident in which you or others could be injured. The address book displays all the contacts from the various sources (mobile phone, memory card, USB device, the phone book of the multi- media system, navigation). You can use the contacts to make telephone calls, navigate and to write messages. If amobile phone is connected to themultimedia system and automatic calling up is activated (Y page 107), the mobile phone's contacts are displayed in the address book. If you disconnect the mobile phone from the multimedia system, these contacts are no longer displayed in the address book. When you import, save, edit or add contacts, they will be saved in the multimedia system. These contacts will remain available even when you connect the multimedia system to a differ- ent mobile phone. You can view these contacts even without a mobile phone.

i The address book can store a total of 5000 contacts. R2000 entries are reserved for permanently saved contacts R3000 entries are reserved for contacts that you can load from the mobile phone

i Before selling your vehicle, delete the con- tacts saved in the multimedia system using the reset function (Y page 43).

Calling up the address book

X To call up the telephone menu: press the % button.

X To switch to the menu bar: slide5 the con- troller.

X To select Tel/: press the controller.

X To select Address Book: turn and press the controller.

X To browse in the address book: turn the con- troller. An address book entry can also include a pic- ture. This is shown to the left of the address data. Address book entries with pictures can only be created by importing vCards (vcf files). Further information on importing vCards (Y page 107). The quality of the pic- ture depends on the picture's resolution.

Searching for a contact

Using the character bar X Call up the address book (Y page 103). X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select Search: turn and press the control- ler.

X To select characters: turn the controller and press to confirm. The first contact with the selected first char- acter is highlighted in the address book. If there are similar contacts, the next different character is shown. For example, with con- tacts such as Jana and John, the beginnings of the names are identical. The next different character A and O are offered for selection.

X Select the characters of the contact you are searching for one by one, pressing and con- firming with the controller each time.

X To end the search: selectb. The contacts in the address book are dis- played.

X To select a contact: turn and press the con- troller.

X To return to the character bar: press the % button repeatedly until the character bar is displayed.

Further information about character entry (Y page 29).

Address book 103

Te le ph on e

Z

Using the number keypad You determine the first letter of the contact you are looking for with the first character you enter. X For example, to enter the letter C: press the l number key briefly three times in suc- cession. The character appears the first time the key is pressed and shows all the available charac- ters. It switches to the next character each time the key is pressed.

Using the touchpad You determine the first letter of the contact you are looking for with the first character you enter. X Draw the letter on the touchpad surface. The first contact with the selected first char- acter is highlighted in the address book. Further information on handwriting recogni- tion on the touchpad (Y page 25).

X Draw additional letters on the touchpad sur- face one after another.

X To complete the search and return to the address book: press the touchpad.

X To select and call the contact: glide up or down and press.

Adding a new contact You can enter address data directly into the address book. If you store telephone numbers in the phone book of themultimedia system, these are also saved in the address book. If you store a navigation destination, themultimedia system creates an address book entry that includes the complete navigable address data. X Call up the address book (Y page 103). X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select New: turn and press the controller. The surname and first name input lines are displayed.

X Enter characters using the controller (Y page 29) or the number keypad, for exam- ple.

X To save the surname and first name: select b. The details for the contact are displayed.

X To add a desired entry: turn and press the controller. Depending on the type of entry, the corre- sponding input menu appears.

X Enter characters using the controller (Y page 29) or the number keypad, for exam- ple.

X To finish and save an entry: selectb.

Displaying contact details

X Call up the address book (Y page 103). X To select a contact: turn and press the con- troller. The details for the contact are displayed.

The entries can be categorized as follows: \ Business details 6 Home details

i An address book entry can contain the fol- lowing information: Rname Rfirst name Rcompany Rup to five telephone numbers Rtwo email addresses RInternet address Rtwo addresses Rgeo-coordinates

Adding information to a contact A maximum of five telephone numbers can be saved for one contact.

104 Address book Te le ph on e

X Call up the address book (Y page 103). X To select a contact: turn and press the con- troller. The details for the contact are displayed.

X To select the desired entry: turn and press the controller. Depending on the type of entry, the corre- sponding input menu appears.

X Enter characters using the controller or the number keypad, for example (Y page 29).

X To finish and save an entry: selectb.

Starting route guidance to an address or geo-coordinates If an address with a ZIP code is saved, the address can be used for route guidance. If the ZIP code cannot be assigned to an exact address, you can adjust the destination subse- quently using the controller. X Call up the address book (Y page 103). X To select a contact: turn and press the con- troller. The details for the contact are displayed.

X To select the address or geo-coordinates: turn and press the controller. The navigation menu is displayed.

X To select Start Route Guidance: slide6 and press the controller. The route to the destination address is calcu- lated and route guidance starts.

Making a call X Call up the address book (Y page 103). X To select a contact: turn and press the con- troller. The details for the contact are displayed.

X To select a telephone number: turn and press the controller. The number is dialed. Further information about the functions during a call (Y page 97).

Sending text messages X Call up the address book (Y page 103). X To select a contact: turn and press the con- troller. The details for the contact are displayed.

X To highlight the telephone number: turn the controller.

X To selectG: slide9 the controller. X To select Send Text Message: turn and press the controller. The entry fields for a text message are dis- played (Y page 115).

Observe the requirements for themessage func- tion (Y page 111).

Sending an e-mail X Call up the address book (Y page 103). X Select an entry: turn and press the controller. The details for the contact are displayed.

X To select an e-mail address: turn and press the controller. The entry fields for an e-mail are displayed (Y page 115).

Observe the requirements for themessage func- tion (Y page 111).

Displaying sub-entry information X Call up the address book (Y page 103). X Select an entry: turn and press the controller. The details for the contact are displayed.

X To highlight the desired entry: turn the con- troller.

X To selectG: slide9 the controller. X To select Details: turn and press the con- troller. The display is shown in full.

X To close the detailed display: press the % button.

Editing a contact X Call up the address book (Y page 103). X To select a contact: turn and press the con- troller. The details for the contact are displayed.

X To highlight the desired entry: turn the con- troller.

X To selectG: slide9 the controller. X To select Edit: turn and press the controller. The entry field for the selected entry is dis- played.

Address book 105

Te le ph on e

Z

Further information about character entry (Y page 29).

Changing the category of an entry X Call up the address book (Y page 103). X Select an entry: turn and press the controller. The details for the contact are displayed.

X To highlight the desired entry: turn the con- troller.

X To selectG: slide9 the controller. X To select Change Category: turn and press the controller.

X To select a category: turn the controller and press to confirm.

X Select Save.

Storing the phone number as a speed dial number X Call up the address book (Y page 103). X Select an entry: turn and press the controller. The details for the contact are displayed.

X To highlight the desired telephone number: turn the controller.

X To selectG: slide9 the controller. X To select Speed Dial: turn and press the controller.

X To select Assign Speed Dial Preset: turn and press the controller.

X To select a memory position for the speed dial: turn and press the controller. The phone number has been saved as a speed dial.

Voice tags

Introduction You can enter voice tags via the Voice Control System (see the separate operating instruc- tions). Once you have assigned a voice tag to an address book entry, you can call up this entry with a voice command and dial a phone number, for example. You can add one voice tag per address book entry.

Adding a voice tag X Call up the address book (Y page 103). X Search for an address book entry with or with- out a voice tag (Y page 103).

X To selectG: slide9 the controller. X To select Voice Tag: turn and press the con- troller.

X To select Add: turn and press the controller. Subsequent operation is voice-controlled. The Voice Control System guides you through the dialogs.

Deleting a voice tag X Call up the address book (Y page 103). X Search for an address book entry with a voice tag (Y page 103).

X To selectG: slide9 the controller. X To select Voice Tag: turn and press the con- troller.

X To select Delete: turn and press the control- ler.

X To select Yes: turn and press the controller. The voice tag is deleted.

Listening to a voice tag X Search for an address book entry with a voice tag (Y page 103).

X To selectG: slide9 the controller. X To select Voice Tag: turn and press the con- troller.

X To select Listen: turn and press the control- ler. You hear the voice tag.

Changing the display and sorting cri- teria for contacts X Call up the address book (Y page 103). X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select Options: turn and press the con- troller.

X To select Display and Sorting: turn and press the controller.

You have the following options: RLast Name, First Name (default setting)

106 Address book Te le ph on e

The contacts are sorted by surname and dis- played with a comma. RLast Name First Name The contacts are sorted by surname and dis- played without a comma. RFirst Name Last Name The contacts are sorted by first name and dis- played without a comma.

X To select the required option: turn and press the controller. The contacts are sorted and displayed according to the selection.

Automatically importing contacts from the phone Depending on the mobile phone used, you can set whether the contacts should be called up automatically after the mobile phone is connec- ted to the multimedia system. X Connect a mobile phone (Y page 91). X Call up the address book (Y page 103). X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select Options: turn and press the con- troller.

X To select Import Contacts Automatically: turn and press the controller. You can allow O or suppress the auto- matic download. If the function is deactiva- ted, contacts which have already been called up will continue to be displayed.

Saving a contact Saved contacts are indicated in the phone book by different symbols (Y page 100). X Call up the address book (Y page 103). X To select a contact: turn and press the con- troller. The details for the contact are displayed.

X To selectG: slide9 the controller. X To select Save: turn and press the controller. The contact has now been saved.

i If the saved address book entry contains a phone number, the entry is also displayed in the phone book.

Saving or editing the contact data in the mul- timedia system does not change the contacts on the mobile phone. If automatic download- ing of phone contacts is activated, the multi- media system displays the copy with the changed data. To add additional data, such as additional phone numbers or e-mail addresses, select this contact. In this way, you avoid creating additional copies of the mobile phone entry.

Deleting a name X Call up the address book (Y page 103). X Search for a contact (Y page 103). X To selectG: slide9 the controller. X To select Delete: turn and press the control- ler.

X To select Yes: turn and press the controller. The contact is deleted.

Closing the address book X Press the % button.

Importing contacts

Information and requirements Contacts can be imported as vCards (vcf files). A vCard is an electronic business card. A memory card, USB device or a Bluetooth connection can be used for importing.

i Up to 2000 entries can be imported into the address book. A message notifies you when the maximum number is reached. In order to be able to then import new contacts, you have to delete existing contacts (Y page 107).

Source Requirements

Memory card The SD card is inserted. It contains importable contact details.

Importing contacts 107

Te le ph on e

Z

USB device The USB device is inserted into the USB port. It contains importable contact details.

Bluetooth connection

If the sending of vCards is supported via Bluetooth, vCards can be received on mobile phones or netbooks, for example. Bluetooth must be activa- ted in the multimedia system and on the respective device; see the manufacturer's oper- ating instructions.

Importing from the memory card or USB device Contacts imported from the memory card or from a USB device are identified by the symbol. The following conditions must be fulfilled in order to import vCards: RvCards (vcf files) may be located in the main directory or in folders. Themultimedia system allows for a targeted selection of the corre- sponding directories. RvCards must have the file extension ".vcf".

i The multimedia system supports vCards in versions 2.1 and 3.0.

X To switch to the menu bar in the telephone menu or the address book: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select Options: turn and press the con- troller.

X To select Download Contacts: turn and press the controller.

X To select From Memory Card , USB 1 or USB2: turn and press the controller. X Select All Folders. or X Select the desired folder or individual vCard. X Select Continue. The selected contacts are imported.

Receiving vCards via Bluetooth

Multimedia system X To switch to the menu bar in the telephone menu or the address book: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select Options: turn and press the con- troller.

X To select Download Contacts: turn and press the controller.

X To select From Bluetooth Device: turn and press the controller. If the multimedia system is connected to a mobile phone, all connections are termina- ted. vCards can now be received by a device (PC, mobile phone) via Bluetooth.

External device X Start the data transfer; see the manufactur- er's operating instructions. The number of vCards received is displayed in the multimedia system.

Multimedia system X To end reception: press the controller or the % button. If a mobile phone was connected, the con- nection to the mobile phone is established again.

vCards received via Bluetooth are identified by the symbol in the phone book.

i If you switch to another main function, e.g. navigation, while receiving vCards, the recep- tion of vCards will be terminated.

Deleting imported contacts X To switch to the menu bar in the telephone menu or the address book: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select Options: turn and press the con- troller.

X To select Delete Contacts: turn and press the controller.

X Select one of the following options: RInternal Contacts RDownloaded from Phone RImported from Storage Device RImported from BT Devices Turn and press the controller.

108 Importing contacts Te le ph on e

X To select Yes: turn and press the controller. The contacts are deleted. i If automatic calling up of the contacts is deactivated (Y page 107), the Downloadedfrom Phone option is available.

Call lists

Introduction If your mobile phone supports the PBAP Blue- tooth profile, the call lists from the mobile phone are displayed in the multimedia system. If the mobile phone call lists cannot be dis- played, the multimedia system generates its own call lists. These are not the same as the call lists in your mobile phone. The Call Lists option is not available unless a mobile phone is connected to the multimedia system. If the contact for an incoming call is not saved in the address book, you can use the call list to save the telephone number. You can save this telephone number as a new contact in the address book or add it to an existing contact (Y page 110).

i If you connect a different mobile phone to the multimedia system, the call lists from the new mobile phone are displayed.

Opening the call list and selecting an entry

: Date and time (if available) ; Telephone number of the highlighted entry

and symbols (if assigned)

X To call up the telephone menu: press the % button.

X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select Call Lists : turn and press the controller.

X To select Calls Received or CallsDialed : turn and press the controller. The relevant list is displayed.

X To highlight an entry: turn the controller. X To make a call: press the controller. Closing the call list X To select&: slide8 and press the con- troller.

or X Press the% button. The list is closed.

Displaying details from a list entry Abbreviated list entries can also be shown in full. X To call up the telephone menu: press the

% button. X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select Call Lists: turn and press the controller.

X To select Calls Received or CallsDialed : turn and press the controller. The relevant list is displayed.

X To highlight the desired entry: turn the con- troller.

X To selectG: slide9 the controller. X To select Details: turn and press the con- troller. The details are displayed.

X To go back to the list: slide8 the controller repeatedly until the list is highlighted.

Call lists 109

Te le ph on e

Z

Saving telephone numbers

Adding new entries to the address book

X To call up the telephone menu: press the % button.

X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X To selectCall Lists: turn and press the con- troller.

X To select Calls Received or Calls Dialed: turn and press the controller. The relevant list is displayed.

X To highlight the desired telephone number: turn the controller.

X To selectG: slide9 the controller. X To select Save: turn and press the controller. X Select New Entry. X Select a number category, e.g. Home. X Select a telephone category, e.g. MobilePhone. The selected category is marked with #. If you havemarked a number as Preferred, it is shown at the top of the list.

X Select Continue. The entry field for the name of the new con- tact is displayed. The entry field for the tele- phone number is filled in automatically.

X Enter characters using the controller (Y page 29) or the number keypad, for exam- ple.

X To finish and save an entry: select . The new contact has been created.

Adding information to an address book entry X To call up the telephone menu: press the

% button. X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select Call Lists: turn and press the controller.

X To select Calls Received or Calls Dialed: turn and press the controller. The relevant list is displayed.

X To highlight the desired telephone number: turn the controller.

X To selectG: slide9 the controller. X To select Save: turn and press the controller. X Select Add to Address Book Entry. X Select a number category, e.g. Home. X Select a telephone category, e.g. MobilePhone. X Select Continue. The address book is displayed.

X Search for the desired contact and highlight (Y page 103).

X To save a telephone number: press the con- troller. A maximum of five telephone numbers can be saved for one contact.

If five numbers are already stored for the con- tact you are searching for, a prompt will appear asking whether you wish to overwrite one of the existing numbers. If you wish to overwrite one of the phone num- bers: X To select Yes: turn and press the controller. A list of the existing five phone numbers is displayed.

X To select the phone number to be overwritten from the list: turn the controller and press to confirm. The entry is overwritten with the new tele- phone number.

If you do not wish to overwrite any of the phone numbers: X To select No: turn and press the controller. The process is canceled.

110 Call lists Te le ph on e

Speed dial lists

Setting up X To call up the telephone menu: press the

% button. X To call up the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select Call Lists: turn and press the controller.

X Select Speed Dial Preset List. The speed dial list is displayed.

X To highlight a memory position for the speed dial: turn the controller. If you highlight an entry that already exists in the speed dial list, this is overwritten with the new entry.

X To selectG: slide9 the controller. X Select Assign Speed Dial Preset. The phone book is displayed.

X Search for a contact (Y page 100). X To select a contact: turn and press the con- troller. The phone number has been saved as a speed dial.

Deleting

Deleting a speed dial preset X To call up the telephone menu: press the

% button. X To call up the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select Call Lists: turn and press the controller.

X Select Speed Dial Preset List . The speed dial list is displayed.

X To highlight the memory position you want to delete: turn the controller.

X To selectG: slide9 the controller. X To select Delete Speed Dial Preset: turn and press the controller.

X To select Yes: turn and press the controller. The speed dial preset has been deleted.

Deleting all speed dial presets X To call up the telephone menu: press the

% button. X To call up the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select Call Lists: turn and press the controller.

X Select Speed Dial Preset List . The speed dial list is displayed.

X To selectG: slide9 the controller. X To select Delete All Speed Dial Presets: turn and press the controller. X To select Yes: turn and press the controller. All speed dials are deleted.

Messages (text messages and e- mails)

General notes New messages are identified by the / sym- bol in the display of the multimedia system and an audible signal. Once you have read all the messages, the symbol is no longer displayed. Themultimedia system displays the 100 newest text messages and e-mails. The symbol is displayed when the mobile phone's message memory is full. The symbol is no longer displayed if you delete messages.

Function restrictions Text messages cannot be written while the vehi- cle is in motion.

Requirements To use the message functions, the connected mobile phonemust support theMAPBluetooth profile. When connecting the mobile phone, you may have to accept the prompt for the MAP Bluetooth profile. With some mobile phones, some settings still have to be made after connecting to the multi- media system (see the manufacturer's operat- ing instructions). The messages are then dis- played the next time you connect to the multi- media system.

Messages (text messages and e-mails) 111

Te le ph on e

Z

An e-mail account must be set up on the mobile phone for the e-mail function (see the manufac- turers operating instructions). To read and write e-mails in the multimedia sys- tem, the e-mail account first needs to be con- figured (Y page 113). Some mobile phones with the MAP Bluetooth profile: Ronly show new text messages Rdo not support the deleting or editing of text messages Rdo not support the drafts folder for text mes- sages Rdo not support the sending of text messages Rdo not support the e-mail function Rdo not send messages when in a locked sta- tus

Not all mobile phones available on the market are equally suitable. Further information about settings and supported functions of Bluetooth- capable mobile phones can be found on the Internet at http://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect. You can also obtain more information by calling. In the USA, you can get in touch with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372). In Canada, you can get in touch with the Cus- tomer Relations Center on 1-800-387-0100.

Settings

Calling up the settings menu for mes- sages X To call up the telephone menu: press the

% button. X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select 1: turn and press the controller. The message menu is displayed.

X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select Settings : turn and press the con- troller. The textmessage settings and the available e- mail accounts of the connectedmobile phone will be displayed.

Configuring the text messages dis- played X Call up the settings menu for messages (Y page 112).

X To highlight Text Message: turn the control- ler.

X To selectG: slide9 the controller. A menu with the following options is shown: RAll Messages All the messages are displayed. RNew Messages Only the messages that are new on the mobile phone are displayed. ROff The messages are not displayed automati- cally. You can display the 100 newest text messages from the mobile phone using theDownload option in the message menu.

X To select the required option: turn and press the controller.

Configuring the e-mails displayed X Call up the settings menu for messages (Y page 112).

X To highlight an e-mail account: turn the con- troller.

X To selectG: slide9 the controller. X To select Automatic Download: turn and press the controller. A menu with the following options is shown: RAll Messages All the messages are displayed. RNew Messages Only the messages that are new on the mobile phone are displayed. ROff The messages are not displayed automati- cally. You can display the 100 newest e- mails from the mobile phone using theDownload option in the message menu.

X To select the required option: turn and press the controller.

112 Messages (text messages and e-mails) Te le ph on e

Configuring an e-mail account X Call up the settings menu for messages (Y page 112).

X To select an e-mail account: turn and press the controller. The e-mail account is now configured. E-mails can now be received and sent in the multi- media system.

Deactivating the e-mail function X Call up the settings menu for messages (Y page 112).

X To select E-Mail Off: turn and press the controller. E-mail reception is deactivated.

Changing the displayed name of the e- mail account X Call up the settings menu for messages (Y page 112).

X To highlight an e-mail account: turn the con- troller.

X To selectG: slide9 the controller. X To select Own E-Mail Address : turn and press the controller. The input menu for entering your own e-mail address is displayed.

Downloading messages manually X To call up the telephone menu: press the

% button. X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select 1: turn and press the controller. The message menu is displayed.

X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select Download : turn and press the con- troller.

Downloading text messages and e-mails from the phone X Select From the Phone . The messages are downloaded. If you have selected Automatic Download in the e-mail settings, manual downloading is not possible.

Updating from the e-mail server by the mobile phone X Select From the E-Mail Server . The e-mails in the mobile phone are updated. This function is not supported by all mobile phones.

Reading messages

In the message menu

The message menu contains all the unread text messages and e-mails. If the corresponding folder is called up, the messages are displayed sorted by text messages and e-mails. X To call up the telephone menu: press the

% button. X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select 1: turn and press the controller. The message menu is displayed with the unread messages.

X To select the message: turn and press the controller. The message text is displayed.

X To close the message text: press the% button.

If you want to read messages that have already been read again, you have to call up the corre- sponding message folder (Y page 114).

Messages (text messages and e-mails) 113

Te le ph on e

Z

In the message folder

X To call up the telephone menu: press the % button.

X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select 1: turn and press the controller. The message menu is displayed.

X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select Folder: turn and press the control- ler.

X To select the desired folder in Text Message or E-Mail category: turn and press the con- troller. The selected folder is displayed.

X To select the message: turn and press the controller. The message is displayed.

X To scroll through themessage or select phone numbers in the text: turn the controller. The display scrolls up or down line by line, or skips to the next or previous telephone num- ber and automatically highlights it.

X To close the message text: press the% button.

The following sub-folders can be selected for text messages and e-mails: RInbox This folder contains all the incoming mes- sages. ROutbox This folder contains all the outgoing mes- sages. RDrafts This folder contains all the messages that you have saved as a draft.

i Folders cannot be selected if they are empty.

Depending on the mobile phone used, the sub- folder function may be available.

Read-aloud function for messages X To start the read-aloud function: press the controller when the message is displayed.

X To select Read Aloud: turn and press the controller. The multimedia system reads the message aloud.

X To cancel the read-aloud function: press the 8 button.

or X Press the controller, select Cancel Read-Aloud Function and press the controller again.

You can set the language (Y page 41) and the speed (Y page 37) of the read-aloud function.

Displaying details and phone numbers The multimedia system can also show a short- ened sender display in full. X To call up the telephone menu: press the

% button. X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select 1: turn and press the controller. The message menu is displayed.

X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select Folder: turn and press the control- ler.

X To select Text Msg. or E-Mail : turn and press the controller. The selected folder is displayed.

X To highlight the desired message: turn the controller.

X To selectG: slide9 the controller. X To select Details: turn and press the con- troller. The detailed view appears.

X To close the detailed display: slide8 the controller.

114 Messages (text messages and e-mails) Te le ph on e

Writing text messages

Writing a new text message

Observe the requirements for themessage func- tion (Y page 111). X To call up the telephone menu: press the

% button. X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select 1: turn and press the controller. The message menu is displayed.

X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select New: turn and press the controller. X To select Text Message: turn and press the controller. The text message input menu is displayed. The To: input line is selected.

Entering a recipient X Enter characters using the controller or the number keypad (Y page 29).

or X To enter a phone number from the phone book: select the symbol. The contacts from the address book which have a phone number are displayed.

X Search for and select an entry (Y page 100). The number is copied to the recipient line.

Entering text and sending text messages X To select an input line for text: select5 in the character bar.

X Enter characters. The multimedia system contains templates which you can use to compile your messages (Y page 116).

X To send the text message: select OK.

Answering a text message Observe the requirements for themessage func- tion (Y page 111). X Display the message (Y page 113). X Press the controller. X To select Reply: turn and press the controller. The text message input menu is displayed. The addressee's details are automatically fil- led in using the details in the original mes- sage.

Writing e-mails

Writing a new e-mail

Observe the requirements for themessage func- tion (Y page 111). X To call up the telephone menu: press the

% button. X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select 1: turn and press the controller. The message menu is displayed.

X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select New: turn and press the controller. X To select E-Mail: turn and press the control- ler. The e-mail input menu appears. The To: input line is selected.

Entering a recipient X Enter characters using the controller or the number keypad (Y page 29).

or

Messages (text messages and e-mails) 115

Te le ph on e

Z

X To insert an e-mail address from the address book: select the symbol. The contacts from the address book which have an e-mail address are displayed.

X Search for and select an entry (Y page 100). The e-mail address is copied to the addressee line.

Entering the subject X To select the Subject: input line: select5 in the character bar.

X Enter characters. Entering text and sending e-mails X To select an input line for text: select5 in the character bar.

X Enter characters. The multimedia system contains templates which you can use to compile your messages (Y page 116).

X To send the e-mail: select OK. Answering an e-mail Observe the requirements for themessage func- tion (Y page 111). X Display the message (Y page 113). X To call up a menu: press the controller. X To select Reply: turn and press the controller. The e-mail input menu appears. The addres- see's details are automatically filled in using the details in the original message.

When replying to an e-mail, you can also selectReply to All instead of Reply. In this case, the reply is sent not just to the sender but to all those who received the original message.

Forwarding an e-mail Observe the requirements for themessage func- tion (Y page 111). X Display the message (Y page 113). X To call up a menu: press the controller. X To select Forward: turn and press the con- troller. The input menu appears. The subject line is automatically filled in with the same details as those in the original message.

Text templates

Using text templates

X Select the input line for a text message (Y page 115) or e-mail (Y page 115).

X To select text templates: in the character bar: turn and press the controller. The text templates are displayed.

X To select and insert a text template: turn and press the controller. The text template is inserted into the text message or e-mail.

Editing text templates

: Displays text templates X Select the input line for a text message (Y page 115) or e-mail (Y page 115).

X To select text templates: in the character bar: turn and press the controller. The text templates are displayed.

X To highlight the text template to be edited: turn the controller.

X To selectG: slide9 the controller. X To select Edit: turn and press the controller. The text template is displayed in an input line.

X Enter characters using the controller or the number keypad (Y page 29).

116 Messages (text messages and e-mails) Te le ph on e

X To adopt changes to the text template, select : turn and press the controller.

X Select Yes. The text template has been changed.

Calling a text message sender X Display the message (Y page 113). X To call up a menu: press the controller. X To select Call Sender : turn and press the controller. The call is made.

Using a phone number in the text Numbers in text messages that are highlighted can be used. X To highlight and select a usable phone num- ber while the message is displayed: turn and press the controller.

X To select Use: turn and press the controller. X To select Call : turn and press the controller. The call is made.

i It is possible that a highlighted numerical sequence may not contain a telephone num- ber.

Storing sender as a new contact

Storing the sender of a text message X To call up the menu when a text message is displayed: press the controller.

X To select Save Number: turn and press the controller.

X Select New Entry. or X Select Add to Address Book Entry. X Select a number category. X Select a telephone category. X Select Continue. The input line for the name of the new contact is displayed. The input line for the telephone number is filled in automatically.

X Enter characters using the controller (Y page 29) or the number keypad.

X To finish the entry: select OK. The new contact has been created.

Saving the sender of an e-mail X To call up the menu when an e-mail is dis- played: press the controller.

X To select Save Sender's E-Mail Address: turn and press the controller. The input line for the name of the new contact is displayed. The input line for the e-mail address is filled in automatically.

X Enter characters using the controller or the number keypad (Y page 29).

X To finish the entry: select OK. The new contact has been created.

Deleting messages X Call up the message folder (Y page 114). X To select the message: turn the controller. X To selectG: slide9 the controller. X To select Delete : turn and press the con- troller.

X To select Yes: turn and press the controller. The message is deleted from the multimedia system and the mobile phone.

i This delete function is not supported by all mobile phones. You will see amessage to this effect.

Dictation function

Requirements To use the dictation function, the connected mobile phonemust support theMAPBluetooth profile. When connecting the mobile phone, you may have to accept the prompt for the MAP Bluetooth profile. With some mobile phones, some settings still have to be made after connecting to the multi- media system (see the manufacturer's operat- ing instructions). An e-mail account must be set up on the mobile phone for the e-mail function (see the manufac- turers operating instructions). To read and write e-mails in the multimedia sys- tem, the e-mail account first needs to be con- figured (Y page 113).

Dictation function 117

Te le ph on e

Z

Some mobile phones with the MAP Bluetooth profile: Rdo not support the deleting or editing of text messages Rdo not support the drafts folder for text mes- sages Rdo not support the sending of text messages Rdo not support the e-mail function Rdo not send messages when in a locked sta- tus

i The availability of the dictation function is country-dependent.

Calling up text messages or e-mails in the message menu X To call up the telephone menu: press the

% button. X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select 1: turn and press the controller. The message menu is displayed.

X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select New: turn and press the controller. X To select Text Message or E-Mail: turn and press the controller. The input menu for the message is displayed.

Calling up and using the dictation function X Select theo microphone. The app for the dictation function is loaded. If there was no prior Internet connection, a connection is now established.

X To start the dictation function: press the controller.

X Say your message. The dictation ends automatically after you have finished speaking. After the spoken message has been pro- cessed, it is shown as text on the display.

X To select words: turn and press the control- ler.

X In the correction menu, you can:

Radjust capitalization of words (if supported by the character set) Radd words Rdelete words Rreplace the dictated message with a new one

X To exit the menu: select Done.

Send message The dictated text is displayed in the message input window. X Enter the telephone number or e-mail address into the addressee line.

X To send the message: select OK. i The availability of the dictation functionmay vary according to the country and vehicle equipment.

Apple CarPlay

Introduction iPhone functions can be used via the multime- dia system using Apple CarPlay. Apple Car- Play can be operated using the controller or Siri voice-operated control system. Whether selected buttons are supported in the vehicle depends on the iOS version of the mobile phone and the apps available. You will find an overview of the multimedia system's control panel and available buttons here (Y page 18). To activate voice-operated control, press and hold the button on themultifunction steer- ing wheel (Y page 99). Apple CarPlay is only available for Apple mobile phones (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). The availability of Apple CarPlaymay vary by coun- try and depending on vehicle equipment. During Apple CarPlay use, various multimedia system functions, such as navigation, are not available. The respective provider is responsible for the application and the associated services and content.

118 Apple CarPlay Te le ph on e

Requirements RApple CarPlay is available from the iPhone 5. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use the latest operating system on the iPhone. RYou require a connector cable for the iPhone. RThe full range of functions for Apple CarPlay is only possible when the Apple CarPlay- capable mobile phone is connected to the Internet.

Connecting the iPhone with the mul- timedia system In order to be able to use Apple CarPlay, a connection must be established between the iPhone and the multimedia system. X Connect the iPhone via a connection cable to the USB port. The first time you connect anAppleCarPlay- capable mobile phone to the multimedia sys- tem or switch between Apple CarPlay-capa- ble mobile phones, a prompt appears asking whether youwant future activation to be auto- matic or manual.

Activating Apple CarPlay Automatic activation X To select Auto : press the controller. Apple CarPlay will start automatically each time a connection has been established between the iPhone and themultimedia sys- tem.

Manual activation X To call up the telephone menu: press the

% button. X To show the main function bar: slide5 the controller.

X To select Tel/: turn and press the control- ler.

X Select Apple CarPlay . Apple CarPlay starts. i Depending on the operating status, not all of the steps may be necessary. A message to start Apple CarPlay appears on the display. Confirm this.

Changing the activation type When the mobile phone is disconnected from themultimedia system, the activationmode can be changed. X To call up the telephone menu: press the

% button. X To display themain function bar: slide5 the controller.

X To select Tel/: press the controller. X Select Apple CarPlay . X To show the menu bar: slide6 the control- ler.

X To select Options: turn and press the con- troller.

X Deactivate or activate O Start AppleCarPlay Automatically .

Canceling Apple CarPlay Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only can- cel Apple CarPlay when your vehicle is sta- tionary. X Remove the connection cable from the USB port. The No Apple CarPlay Device Connected Please ensure that your deviceis connected to the correct USB port. message appears.

Transmitted vehicle data When using Apple CarPlay, specific vehicle data are transmitted to the mobile phone. This makes it possible to use selected mobile phone services efficiently. The mobile phone does not have active access to vehicle data. The following system information is transmitted: RMultimedia system software version RSystem ID (anonymous) These data are transmitted in order to optimize communication between the vehicle and mobile phone. A random vehicle code is generated for this pur- pose and in order to assign multiple vehicles to the mobile phone. This code is not related to the vehicle identifi- cation number (VIN) and is deleted if the multi- media system is reset (Y page 43).

Apple CarPlay 119

Te le ph on e

Z

The following driving status data is transmitted: RGear position engaged RDifference between parked, stationary, coasting and driving RInstrument cluster day/night mode These data are transmitted in order to adapt the content displayed to the driving situation. The following position data is transmitted: RCoordinates RSpeed RCompass direction RAcceleration direction These data are transmitted only when naviga- tion is active in order to improve navigation (e.g. when driving through a tunnel).

Android Auto

Introduction Android Auto can be used for functions on mobile phones with the Android operating sys- tem: RAndroid Auto-capable apps of the mobile phone are shown in the multimedia system. RAudio content from the mobile phone is played back in the multimedia system.

Only one mobile phone at a time can be con- nected to the multimedia system via Android Auto. During Android Auto use, various multimedia system functions such as navigation, are not available. The availability of Android Auto and Android Auto appsmay vary from country to country and depending on the equipment in the vehicle. The respective provider is responsible for the application and the associated services and content.

Connecting a mobile phone via Android Auto Requirements: RFor safety reasons, initial activation of Android Auto on the multimedia system must be carried out while the vehicle is stationary. RThe mobile phone supports Android Auto starting from Android 5.0.

RThe Android Auto app is installed on the mobile phone. RIn order to use the telephone functions, a mobile phone needs to be connected with the multimedia system via Bluetooth. RThe full range of functions for Android Auto is only possible with an Internet connection. RThe mobile phone is connected to the USB port on themultimedia systemvia aUSB cable.

The multimedia system automatically estab- lishes a connection to the mobile phone via Bluetooth. If this is unsuccessful, an errormes- sage will appear. In this case, you should con- nect the mobile phone manually via Bluetooth (Y page 91). Starting Android Auto Multimedia system X To call up the telephone menu: press the

% button. X To show the main function bar: slide5 the controller.

X To select Tel/: press the controller. X To select Android Auto: turn and press the controller. A message informs you that no Android Auto device is connected.

Mobile phone X Connect the mobile phone to the USB port in the center console. When activated manually, a message to start Android Auto appears on the display of the multimedia system.

X To confirm the message: press the controller. The Android Auto app is shown in the multi- media system display.

Setting up automatic connection X To call up the telephone menu: press the

% button. X To display themain function bar: slide5 the controller.

X To select Tel/: press the controller. X To select Android Auto: turn and press the controller.

X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select Options: turn and press the con- troller.

120 Android Auto Te le ph on e

X To select Start Android Auto Automatically: turn and press the controller. X Allow automatic connection O. Android Auto starts automatically as soon as the mobile phone is connected to the USB port of the multimedia system.

Changing the sound settings WhenAndroid Auto is active, you can change the sound settings in the radio menu. X To call up the radio menu: press the $ button.

X To show the main function bar: slide5 the controller.

X To select Radio: turn and press the controller. X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select: turn and press the controller. Change the sound settings.

Activating voice control When Android Auto is active, you can start the mobile phone's voice control. X Press and hold the? button on the multi- function steering wheel. Depending on the mobile phone a tone sounds.

Ending Android Auto Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only can- cel Android Autowhen your vehicle is stationary. X Terminate the USB connection between the mobile phone and the multimedia system. The No Android Auto Device ConnectedPlease ensure that your device isconnected to the correct USB port. message appears in themultifunction display.

Transmitted vehicle data When using Android Auto, specific vehicle data is transmitted to the mobile phone. This makes it possible to use selected mobile phone serv- ices efficiently. The mobile phone does not have active access to vehicle data.

The following system information is transmitted: RMultimedia system software version RSystem ID (anonymous) These data are transmitted in order to optimize communication between the vehicle and mobile phone. A random vehicle code is generated for this pur- pose and in order to assign multiple vehicles to the mobile phone. This code is not related to the vehicle identifi- cation number (VIN) and is deleted if the multi- media system is reset (Y page 43). The following driving status data is transmitted: RGear position engaged RDifference between parked, stationary, coasting and driving RInstrument cluster day/night mode These data are transmitted in order to adapt the content displayed to the driving situation. The following position data is transmitted: RCoordinates RSpeed RCompass direction RAcceleration direction These data are transmitted only when naviga- tion is active in order to improve navigation (e.g. when driving through a tunnel).

Android Auto 121

Te le ph on e

Z

Your multimedia system equipment

These operating instructions describe all the standard and optional equipment of your multi- media system, as available at the time of going to press. Country-specific differences are pos- sible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not feature all functions described here. This also applies to safety-relevant systems and func- tions. Read the information on qualified specialist workshops in the vehicle Operator's Manual.

Important safety notes

G WARNING If you operate information systems and com- munication equipment integrated in the vehi- cle when driving, you may be distracted from the traffic situation. You could also lose con- trol of the vehicle. There is a risk of an acci- dent. Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you are not sure that this is possible, park the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions and operate the equip- ment when the vehicle is stationary.

Youmust observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are driving when operating the system.

Conditions for access

USA: to use Mercedes-Benz Apps and Internet access, mbrace must be activated and opera- tional. Furthermore, mbrace must be activated for Mercedes-Benz Apps and Internet access. Canada: to use Mercedes-Benz Apps and Inter- net access, Mercedes me connect must be acti- vated and operational. Furthermore, Mercedes me connect must be activated for Mercedes- Benz Apps and Internet access. Take note of the connection priorities. An emer- gency call has the highest priority. When a ser- vice call, e.g. a breakdown service call or theMB Info Call, is active, an emergency call can still be initiated. A service call, on the other hand, has

priority over a current Internet connection. Therefore, you cannot establish an Internet con- nection during a service call. The terms of use are shown when the system is used for the first time and then once a year thereafter. Only read and accept the terms of use when the vehicle is stationary. The driver is not permitted to call up websites while driving and use of the Mercedes-Benz Apps is restricted.

i The availability of individual Mercedes-Benz Apps may vary depending on the country.

Establishing/ending the connection

Establishing a connection Read the conditions for establishing a connec- tion (Y page 122). A connection can be established, for example by: Rentering a web address Rcalling up a Mercedes-Benz App Rcalling up a favorite Ending the connection X Press Cancel in the connections window.

Connection status

: Display of existing connection and signal strength

In most cases, the current connection status is then shown in the status bar when you switch to another main function.

122 Establishing/ending the connection On

lin e an d In te rn et fu nc tio

ns

Detailed connection status X To call up the telephone menu: press the

% button. X To switch to the main function bar: slide5 the controller.

X To select Tel/: press the controller. X To select Internet: turn and press the con- troller. The menu with the Internet functions is dis- played.

X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select Settings: turn and press the con- troller.

X To select Connection Status: turn and press the controller. The following information is displayed: Rthe volume of transferred data Rconnection status

Ending the connection You cannot cancel the connection yourself. The Internet connection is automatically terminated if the system does not recognize any user input within a five-minute time period.

Mercedes-Benz Apps

General notes To be able to useMercedes-Benz Apps, you have to register and confirm the terms and condi- tions.

Calling up Mercedes-Benz Apps X To call up the telephone menu: press the

% button. X To switch to the main function bar: slide5 the controller.

X To select Tel/: press the controller. X To select Internet: turn and press the con- troller.

X To select Mercedes-Benz Apps: turn and press the controller.

X To call up the app: turn and press the con- troller.

You can find further Mercedes-Benz Apps and information under: http://apps.mercedes-benz.com/apps/

i The available features are country-depend- ent. License fees may be applicable.

Voice-operated control of Mercedes- Benz Apps If voice-operated control of a Mercedes-Benz app is available, this is shown by theo sym- bol in the app. X Call up a Mercedes-Benz app (Y page 123). X To use voice-operated control: selecto. X Say the question or prompt.

i The voice-operated control system is not available in all countries or all languages.

Web browser

Calling up a website

Function restrictions Internet pages cannot be shown while the vehi- cle is in motion.

Entering a web address

X To call up the telephone menu: press the % button.

X To switch to the main function bar: slide5 the controller.

X To select Tel/: press the controller.

Web browser 123

On lin e an d In te rn et fu nc tio

ns

Z

X To select Internet: turn and press the con- troller. The menu with the Internet functions is dis- played.

X To select www: turn and press the controller. An input menu for the web address is dis- played.

X Enter characters using the controller or the number keypad.

X To finish entry and call up a website: select .

Selecting a web address from the list X When the character bar is displayed, slide 5 the controller.

X To select the desired web address: turn and press the controller. The web address can still be changed as desired.

X To call up a website: select . The website is called up.

Navigating the website

Step Result

X Turn the controller. Navigates from one selectable item (e.g. link, text field or menu) to the next and highlights the respec- tive element on the website.

Sliding the controller: X Left or right1 X Up or down4 X Diagonally2

Moves the pointer on the page.

X Press the control- ler.

Opens the selected item.

X Press%. Calls up the menu.

Menu functions

: Closes the browser ; Back or forwards = Updates or cancels ? URL entry A Favorites B Options X To show the menu: press the% button. X To call up theOptionsmenu: select3 by turning and pressing the controller.

X To close the website: select&. X To call up the previous website: select t.

X To call up the next website: selectu. X To refresh the website: select. The website is refreshed. This procedure may take some time. i While the website is loading, a cross appears in the menu. This can be used to can- cel the loading procedure.

X To enter a URL: selectg. X Enter a web address (URL) (Y page 123). X Favorites: selectf. The Favorites menu appears (Y page 126).

Options menu

Adding to bookmarks Adds the current website to the favorites. The website can then be called up using the menu. You can store up to 20 favorites in the menu. X To show the menu: press the% button. X To select3: turn and press the controller. X Select Add to Bookmarks. The The page has been added to yourbookmarks. message appears.

124 Web browser On

lin e an d In te rn et fu nc tio

ns

Current URL X To show the menu: press the% button. X To select3: turn and press the controller. X Select Current URL. The URL appears.

Zoom You can use this function to enlarge web pages. X To show the menu: press the% button. X To select3: turn and press the controller. A menu appears. The # dot indicates the cur- rent setting.

X Select Zoom. X To navigate on the web page: slide1, 4 or2 the controller.

X To zoom in on the web page: turn the control- ler.

Jumping from link to link You can use this function to skip from one link to the next on a website. X To show the menu: press the% button. X To select3: turn and press the controller. A menu appears. The # dot indicates the cur- rent setting.

X Select Jump From Link To Link. If a website has been called up and the con- troller is turned, the cursor jumps from link to link.

Directional scrolling You can use this function to scroll up and down on the web page. X To show the menu: press the% button. X To select3: turn and press the controller. A menu appears. The # dot indicates the cur- rent setting.

X Select Directional Scrolling. If a website has been called up and the con- troller is turned, the cursor moves up or down depending on the direction of the turn.

Settings

Overview X To show the menu: press the% button. X To select3: turn and press the controller. A menu appears.

X Select Settings. You can activate or deactivate the following set- tings: RDownload Images Automatically It may take some time to download the con- tents of websites that contain a large amount of images. Therefore, it may be useful to deac- tivate this option. RBlock Pop-Ups Pop-ups are windows (usually with advertise- ments) which are displayed automatically when you call up a website. You can block these displays. RActivate Javascript Javascript makes it possible to display and interact with dynamic content on thewebsite. RAllow Cookies Some websites save information in small text files (cookies) on your system. You can deter- mine whether cookies may be stored. REnable Internet Audio You can switch the browser's audio playback on or off here. RHide Scroll Bars You can show or hide the scroll bar here. RShow Link Target You can display the link's URL here. RCharacter Size You can select the font size which is used when displaying the website. RCharacter Code You can select a different character set here, e.g. if the characters of a website appear dis- torted.

Changing settings X To select the desired setting: turn and press the controller. Switch the setting on O or off .

Web browser 125

On lin e an d In te rn et fu nc tio

ns

Z

Changing the character size or character code X Select Character Size or Character Code. X To select the setting you require: turn and press the controller.

i If you change the settings, the websitesmay not be displayed correctly.

Deleting private data

X Press the % button. X To switch to the main function bar: slide5 the controller.

X To select Tel/: press the controller. X To select Internet: turn and press the con- troller.

X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select Settings: slide6, turn and press the controller. A menu appears.

X To select Delete Private Data: turn and press the controller.

X To select the setting you require: turn and press the controller.

or X Select Delete All Data On Exit. Switch the setting on O or off .

Option Function

All Deletes all personal data.

Cache Deletes data in the cache.

Cookies Deletes cookies that are created by web- sites which you have called up.

Option Function

URL History Deletes all websites visited (path).

O Delete AllData On Exit If this function is acti- vated O, all personal data is deleted when you exit the Internet browser.

Favorites

Introduction Favorites are frequently visited websites.

Creating favorites Adding a favorite in the menu X Press the % button. The last function called up appears.

X To select Tel/ in the main function bar: slide5, turn and press the controller. A menu appears.

X To select Internet: turn and press the con- troller. The menu for the Internet functions appears.

X Select www. X Enter the web address (URL) and name using the character bar and press .

Add to favorites X To call up the menu: press the% button. X To select3: turn and press the controller. X Select Add to Bookmarks (Y page 124).

Selecting favorites X Press the % button. The last function called up appears.

X To select Tel/ in the main function bar: slide5, turn and press the controller. A menu appears.

X To select Internet: turn and press the con- troller. The menu for the Internet functions appears.

126 Web browser On

lin e an d In te rn et fu nc tio

ns

X To select the Internet Favorites menu: turn and press the controller. The Favorites menu appears.

X Select the desired bookmark. The favorite is opened in a new window.

Editing favorites X Press the % button. The last function called up appears.

X To select Tel/ in the main function bar: slide5, turn and press the controller. A menu appears.

X To select Internet: turn and press the con- troller. The menu for the Internet functions appears.

X To select the Internet Favorites menu: turn and press the controller. The Favorites menu appears.

X To bring the desired favorites to the front. X To select Edit: slide6 and press the con- troller. An input menu appears.

X Enter a web address (URL). X Press the touchpad or controller. X Selectp. X Press the touchpad or controller. X Slide6 the controller. X Enter a name.

Deleting favorites X Press the % button. The last function called up appears.

X To select Tel/ in the main function bar: slide5, turn and press the controller. A menu appears.

X To select Internet: turn and press the con- troller. The menu for the Internet functions appears.

X To select the Internet Favorites menu: turn and press the controller. The Favorites menu appears.

X To bring the desired favorites to the front. X To select Delete: slide6 and press the controller. A prompt appears.

X Select Yes. The favorite is deleted.

Closing the browser X Select% in the browser menu (Y page 124)

or X Press the% button for longer than two seconds. A prompt appears, asking whether you want to close the Internet browser.

X Select Yes. The application is closed.

Web browser 127

On lin e an d In te rn et fu nc tio

ns

Z

Your multimedia system equipment

These operating instructions describe all the standard and optional equipment of your multi- media system, as available at the time of going to press. Country-specific differences are pos- sible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not feature all functions described here. This also applies to safety-relevant systems and func- tions. Read the information on qualified specialist workshops in the vehicle Operator's Manual.

Switching on the radio

X Press the $ button. The Radio menu appears. You will hear the last station set on the waveband selected last.

Switching HD Radio on/off X In radio mode: slide6 the controller. X Select Options . X Switch HD Radio on O or off . If HD Radio is switched off, the system does not switch to digital radio and it is not possible to select any sub-channels.

i HD Radio Technology Manufactured Under License From iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and Foreign Patents. The HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity digital.

Overview

: Main function bar ; Status bar with compass display = Main display field with available stations and

relevant information ? Display of radio station selected A Radio menu bar The following functions can be called up in the main function bar by selecting the menu item Radio: RHD Radio FM: HD FM radio mode RHD Radio AM: HD MW radio mode RSat Radio: satellite radio RInfo on Radio: information on radio in the Digital Operator's Manual RRadio Station Presets: 100 preset posi- tions for radio stations

The following functions are available using the radio menu bar: ROptions: radio options R: searches for stations by name RPreset: station presets menu RBand: waveband selection RInformation: displays additional informa- tion about the current station (radio text or Artist Experience) R: sound settings, harman/kardon Logic 7, Bang & Beosound

128 Overview Ra di o

Sets the waveband

X In radio mode: press the $ button. A menu appears with a selection of HDRadio FM, HD Radio AM, Sat Radio, Infoon Radio and Radio Station Presets.

X Turn the controller until the required wave- band is in the center. Press the controller.

Station

Selecting a station

Setting the station in radio mode All currently available stations are displayed. X In radio mode, turn the controller until the desired station is in the center.

Setting a station from the current sta- tion list X In radio mode, press the controller. The station list appears with the stations cur- rently available.

X To select the desired station: turn and press the controller. i The loudspeaker symbol in front of a station indicates the currently set station.

Entering the station frequency X In radio mode: slide6 the controller. The radio menu bar appears.

X To select Options: turn and press the con- troller.

X Select Enter Frequency. X Enter the frequency of the desired station in the entry field.

Finding a station X In radio mode: slide6 the controller. The radio menu bar appears.

X Select and enter the first letters of the required station using the controller.

X Press OK to confirm. A list with available stations appears.

X To select stations from the list: turn the con- troller and press to confirm.

Activating/deactivating the station presets display

Activating You can use this function to change to the sta- tion presets display. X In radio mode: slide6 the controller. X To select Preset: turn and press the control- ler.

X To select Station Preset View: On: press the controller. The station preset display appears.

X To switch between the stored stations: turn the controller.

Deactivating X In radio mode: slide6 the controller. X To select Preset: turn and press the control- ler.

X To select Station Preset View: Off: press the controller. The view of the last heard waveband appears.

Saving a station Storing current stations X In radio mode: slide6 the controller. The radio menu bar appears.

X To select Preset: turn and press the control- ler.

X To select the Save Current Station/Channel option: turn and press the controller. X To select the position of the required preset entry: turn and press the controller. The currently set station is stored in the selec- ted preset position. A tone signals a success- ful preset entry.

Storing a station using the number keypad X Set the desired station in radio mode. X Press and hold down the preset number to be assigned on the number keypad until a tone confirms the storing process.

X If the preset number has two digits, press the first digit briefly and then press and hold down the second digit. A tone confirms that the storing process was successful.

Station 129

Ra di o

Storing a station using the controller X Set the desired station in radio mode. X Press and hold the controller until the preset list appears.

X To select the preset number: turn and press the controller.

i Frequencies have already been stored in the multimedia system. There are 100 preset positions available.

Moving highlighted stations X In radio mode: slide6 the controller. X To select Preset: turn and press the control- ler.

X Select Edit Station Preset . X To select the required preset entry: turn the controller.

X Slide9 the controller. An additional menu appears.

X To select the Move Highlighted Station/Channel option: turn and press the control- ler. The list of stored stations appears again.

X To move the highlighted station to the new position: turn the controller and press to con- firm.

Deleting highlighted stations X In radio mode: slide6 the controller. X To select Preset: turn and press the control- ler.

X Select Edit Station Preset . X To select the required preset entry: turn the controller.

X Slide9 the controller. X To select the Delete Highlighted Station/Channel option in the additional menu: turn and press the controller.

or X Press the$ button. A prompt appears.

X To select Yes: turn and press the controller. The highlighted station is deleted.

Tagging music tracks

This function allows you to transfer the music track currently playing to an Apple device and then purchase it in the iTunes store. X In radio mode: slide6 the controller. X To select Options : turn and press the con- troller.

X Select Tag This Track. A message appears in the multimedia system about storing the track information.

Displaying station information

X In radio mode: slide6 the controller. X To select Options: turn and press the con- troller.

X Switch Show Station Information on O or off . If the function is active, the artist and track will also be displayed in themain display field.

Calling up sound settings

X In radio mode: slide6 the controller. The radio menu bar appears.

X To select: turn and press the controller. The sound menu appears (Y page 157).

Displaying information

This function is available in HD FM radio and HD AM radio mode. Reception is only possible if the radio stations provide the relevant information. X To select Information in the radiomenu bar: turn and press the controller. Information on the currently received pro- gram is displayed.

If available, you will see: Rthe track that is currently being played Rthe artist of the track that is currently being played Rthe album name

130 Displaying information Ra di o

Rthe channel abbreviation Rthe logo of the station or Artist Experience

Returning to the radio menu: X To select Information : slide6 and press the controller.

or X Press the% button.

Satellite radio

General notes The satellite radio mode requires satellite radio equipment and registration with a satellite radio provider. Note that the categories and channels shown in the illustrations depend on the program content offered by the provider. The illustrations and descriptions in these operating instructionsmay therefore differ from the channels and catego- ries offered by the provider. Satellite radiomodemay be temporarily unavail- able or interrupted for a variety of reasons. These include environmental or topographical conditions as well as other factors beyond the control of Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. Thismeans operation may not be possible in certain areas. These include: Rtunnels Rparking garages Rlocations inside or next to buildings Rlocations in the vicinity of other structures Sirius XM Satellite Radio offers more than 140 digital-quality radio channels, providing 100% commercial-free music, sports, news and enter- tainment. Sirius XM Satellite Radio uses a fleet of high- performance satellites to broadcast around the clock throughout the USA and Canada. The satellite radio program is available for a monthly fee. Details are available from the SIR- IUS XM Service Center and at http://www.siriusxm.com (USA) or http://www.siriusxm.ca (Canada). Your new Mercedes-Benz vehicle comes with Sirius XM Satellite Radio pre-installed at the factory. This service is free for a six-month trial period. About a month before the trial period ends, information will be provided on how to extend this subscription. An acoustic signal

sounds and amessage is shown, describing how the subscription can be extended.

i Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries. All other marks, channel names and logos are the property of their respective owners. All rights reserved.

Registering satellite radio

: Phone number of provider ; Sirius XM ID of your satellite receiver X Switch on SatRadio mode (Y page 132). The satellite radio main menu appears show- ing the preview channel. You cannot select any other stations.

X To select Options in the radio menu bar: turn and press the controller.

X To select Service : turn and press the con- troller. The service information screen appears.

Once the telephone connection has been estab- lished: X Follow the instructions of the service staff. The activation process may take up to ten minutes.

i You can also have the satellite service acti- vated online. To do so, please visit http://www.siriusxm.com (USA) or http://www.siriusxm.ca (Canada).

i If registration is not included when purchas- ing the system, your credit card details will be required to activate your account.

If the satellite receiver is not installed correctly, the Device Unavailablemessage will appear.

Satellite radio 131

Ra di o

Switching to satellite radio X To show the main function bar: slide5 the controller.

X To select Radio: turn and press the controller. The Radio menu appears. You will hear the last station set on the waveband selected last.

X To select Radio in radio mode: slide5 and press the controller. The menu with the available radio modes appears.

X To select Sat Radio : turn and press the con- troller.

The No Servicemessage appears if there is no signal.

Satellite radio overview

: Main function bar ; Preset = Channel name and channel number ? Channel information A Station presets menu B Category list C Keyword search D Options menu Channel information? can be viewed in detail (Y page 134).

Selecting a category Satellite radio channels are sorted into catego- ries. You can choose between various catego- ries such as News/Discussions, Sports and Country (if available). The category list is sorted alphabetically. The content of the categories is sorted by channel numbers.

X To call up the category list: select Cate gory in the menu bar by turning and pressing the controller. The category list appears.

X To select a category: turn and press the controller. The category selected is shown in the display. You hear the channel last selected for this category. The# dot indicates the current setting. When you select a specific category, the channels are filtered exclusively according to this category. Select the All Channels cat- egory in order to see all of the available chan- nels. Only this category enables you to browse all available stations.

Selecting a channel

Changing channels X When the display/selection window in the satellite radio display is selected, slide1 or turn the controller. The multimedia system switches to the next available channel.

Entering the channel number directly X To select Options in the radio menu bar: turn and press the controller. The satellite radio menu appears.

X To select Enter Channel : turn and press the controller. An input menu appears.

X Enter the desired channel in the entry field. or X Press theg key on the number keypad. An input menu appears.

X For the channel number, press the corre- sponding number keys on the control panel one after the other.

X Press thez key on the number keypad. The multimedia system sets the selected channel. i You can only select currently permitted dig- its.

132 Satellite radio Ra di o

Selecting a channel via the satellite radio station list You can select the channel using the station list displaying the artists and tracks that are cur- rently playing. X To select Options in the radio menu bar: turn and press the controller.

X To select Station List with Artist &Title : turn and press the controller. The channel list appears.

or X Press the controller in the main display field. X Select the desired channel

Keyword search X To select the keyword search in the menu bar: turn and press the controller.

X To enter the required search term: turn and press the controller. Direct and indirect results are shown.

X Select the required result. The relevant channel is played.

Memory functions There are 100 presets available. Saving the current channel X To select Preset in the radio menu bar: turn and press the controller.

X To select Edit Station Preset : turn and press the controller. The list of saved channels appears.

X To select the preset: turn the controller and press for about two seconds. The newly saved channel overwrites the exist- ing preset.

Saving a channel using the controller X Set the desired channel in satellite radio mode.

X Press and hold the controller until the preset list appears.

X To select the preset number: turn and press the controller. A tone confirms that the storing process was successful.

Using quick save X Set the desired channel in satellite radio mode.

X Press and hold a number key for two seconds. The channel is saved to the corresponding position in the channel presets. The newly saved channel overwrites the exist- ing preset.

Deleting the highlighted channel X To select Preset in the radio menu bar: turn and press the controller.

X Select Edit Station Preset . X To select the required preset entry: turn the controller.

X Slide9 the controller. X To select the Delete Highlighted Station/Channel option in the additional menu: turn and press the controller.

or X Press the$ button. A prompt appears.

X To select Yes: turn and press the controller. The highlighted station is deleted.

Activating/deactivating the station presets display You can use this function to change to the sta- tion presets display. Activating X In radio mode: slide6 the controller. X To select Preset: turn and press the control- ler.

X To select Station Preset View: On: turn and press the controller. The station preset display appears.

X To switch between the stored stations: turn the controller.

Deactivating X In radio mode: slide6 the controller. X To select Preset: turn and press the control- ler.

X To select Station Preset View: Off: turn and press the controller. The view of the last heard waveband appears.

Satellite radio 133

Ra di o

Music and sports alerts

General notes This function makes it possible to store a pro- gram alert for your favorite artists, tracks or sporting events. You can store up to 30 music and sports alerts (favorites). Music alerts can only be saved whilst a track is being played. You can also specify sports alerts via the menu option. The system then continu- ously searches through all the channels. If a match is found with a saved message, you will be informed. A window appears with the respec- tive information.

Setting a music alert X To select Options in the radio menu bar: turn and press the controller.

X To select Alert for Artist, Track &Sports Event : turn and press the controller. A menu appears.

X Select Add New Alert . A window with a prompt appears.

X Select Artist or Track . The alert is set for the current artist or track. i If an alert cannot be set, the No AlertsAvailablemessage appears. Setting a sports alert X To select Options in the menu bar: turn and press the controller.

X To select Alert for Artist, Track &Sports Event : turn and press the controller. A menu appears.

X Select Manage Sports Alerts . A menu appears.

X Select Select New Alerts . A menu appears.

X Select the desired team from a league, e.g. college, NBA, NHL, NFL or MLB. The alert function for the sports team is added.

A window with music and sports alerts appears X Select Change To . The channel is changed and the favorite artist or track is played.

or X Select Ignore . The current channel will continue playing.

Editing music and sports alerts X To select Alert for Artist, Track &Sports Event : turn and press the controller. A menu appears.

X Select Manage Music Alerts or ManageSports Alerts . A list of set alerts appears.

Switching music and sports alerts on/off X Switch Activate Music Alerts onO or off

. X Switch Activate Sports Alerts on O or off .

Tagging music tracks If the channel supports this function, you are able to transfer themusic track currently playing to an Apple device. You can then purchase it in the iTunes store. X To select Options in the radio menu bar: turn and press the controller.

X To select Tag This Track : turn and press the controller. A message about saving this music track on the Apple device appears.

Displaying information X To select Information in the radiomenu bar: turn and press the controller. Information on the currently received pro- gram is displayed.

If available, the following information is dis- played: Rthe channel logo Rthe channel abbreviation

134 Satellite radio Ra di o

Rthe artist of the track that is currently being played Rthe track that is currently being played Rthe category Ror the composer X To return to the radio menu: select Infor mation by sliding6 and pressing the con- troller.

Displaying service information The satellite radio provider's customer service center is available by phone at any time to answer any general questions or questions on the versions available. X To select Options in the menu bar: turn and press the controller.

X To select Service : turn and press the con- troller. The Sirius XM ID of your satellite receiver and the telephone number of the provider appear.

X To return to the radiomenu: press the% button.

Channel list updates During reception of a new channel list, theUpdating Channels... message is shown. The channel last selected is switched to mute until the update has been completed. Satellite radio mode is not available during this process. Once the update has been completed, the sat- ellite radio menu appears. The channel previ- ously selected will be played if it is still available.

Sound settings Information on sound settings (Y page 157).

Satellite radio 135

Ra di o

Your multimedia system equipment

These operating instructions describe all the standard and optional equipment of your multi- media system, as available at the time of going to press. Country-specific differences are pos- sible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not feature all functions described here. This also applies to safety-relevant systems and func- tions. Read the information on qualified specialist workshops in the vehicle Operator's Manual.

Activating media mode

General notes There are several ways to activate media sour- ces using the multimedia system. The relevant sections of the Operator's Manual describe the simplest way to activate a media source. This section describes all options for activating media sources.

Connections for external media sour- ces

The following external media sources can be used: RApple devices (e.g. iPhone) RUSB devices (e.g. USB stick, MP3 player) Two USB ports are located in the stowage space under the armrest. RCD RDVD video RSD cards RDevices with Bluetooth connection

Activating media using the button X Press the button. The last media source you have set is dis- played.

X Press the button again. The menu appears with the available media sources.

X To select media sources: turn the controller until the desiredmedia source is in the center. Press the controller. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the fol- lowing media sources will be available: RDisc RMemory Card RMedia Interface 1 RMedia Interface 2 RBluetooth Audio

Switching on automatically When an external media source is connected, CD and SDmemory card functions are automat- ically switched on by the multimedia system. When using with USB devices, switch to the respective media menu. If playable music files are found, they will be played by the multimedia system.

i If media playback is active in themultimedia system, it is interrupted. The media menu of the newly connected device appears (except when using with USB/iPod). If another func- tion, such as navigation, is being operated, the display does not change.

Activatingmedia using themain func- tion bar X To show themain function bar inmediamode: slide5 the controller.

X To select Media: press the controller. A menu appears with the available media sources.

X To select the media source: turn the control- ler and press to confirm. If the media source contains music or video files, these will be played. The corresponding media menu is shown.

136 Activating media mode M ed ia

Activating media using the number keypad X To select a media source: press the corre- sponding number key. If the media source contains music or video files, these will be played. The corresponding media menu is shown.

X To enter the track number: press theg button. A menu appears.

X Use the number keypad to enter the track number. The track is played. Use thes button to show the track infor- mation for the track that is currently playing.

Activating media using the device list X In Media mode, slide6 the controller. The media menu bar appears.

X To select Devices: turn and press the con- troller. The available media sources will be shown. The # dot indicates the current setting.

X Select the media source. If the media source contains music or video files, these will be played. The corresponding media menu is shown. i In Bluetooth audio mode, it is not possible to select media via the device list.

Audio/video mode

Important safety notes

G WARNING The CD/DVD drive is a class 1 laser product. If you open the housing of the CD/DVD drive, there is a risk of exposure to invisible laser radiation. This laser radiation could damage your retina. There is a risk of injury. Never open the housing. Always have main- tenance and repair work carried out at a quali- fied specialist workshop.

G WARNING If you handle a disc while driving, you may be distracted from the traffic situation. You could

also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only handle a disc when the vehicle is sta- tionary.

Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers a distance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) per sec- ond.

Notes on audio/video mode

Permissible data carriers RCD audio, CD-R and CD-RW RDVD video, DVD-R and DVD-RW (audio for- mats PCM DTS and Dolby Digital) RSD card RUSB storage device RApple devices

i Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

i For DTS patents see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, the Symbol & DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks, and DTS Digital Surround is a trademark of DTS, Inc. DTS, Inc. All rights reserved.

Permissible file systems RISO 9660/Joliet standard for CDs RUDF for video DVDs RFAT16, FAT32, exFAT and NTFS for SD card and USB storage media RHFS and HFS+ for Apple devices

i Writing access is not possible on NTFS.

Multisession CDs For multi-session CDs, the content of the first CD session determines how themultimedia sys- temwill process the CD. Themultimedia system only plays back one CD session and gives prior- ity to the first session on the CD.

Audio/video mode 137

M ed ia

Z

File structure of a data carrier When you create a disc with compressed music files, the tracks can be organized in folders. A folder may also contain subfolders. The disc may contain no more than eight directory levels (a root and seven sub-levels). Files beyond the eighth level will not be recognized by the sys- tem.

i The multimedia system supports up to 25,000 files for all of the connected sources.

Track and file names When you create a disc with compressed music files, you can assign names to the tracks and folders. You should observe the following when assign- ing track names: Rtrack namesmust have at least one character Rtrack namesmust have an extension of a sup- ported audio or video format, e.g. mp3, aac or m4v Rthere must be a dot between the track name and the extension Example of a correct track name: "Track1.mp3".

Permissible formats The multimedia system supports the following audio and video formats:

Audio for- mats

MP3, WMA, CDA, AAC for- mats (.aac, .mp4, .m4a and .m4b)

Video for- mats

DVD-V, MPEG, WMV, M4V, AVI up to 720p

Copy-protected iTunes music files with the .m4p file extension are not supported.

Permissible sampling and data rates Themultimedia system supports MP3 andWMA files of the following type:

Format Data rate [kbit/s]

Sampling rates [kHz]

MP3 32-320 (fixed and varia- ble data rates)

8-48

WMA 5-384 (fixed and varia- ble data rates)

8-48

The multimedia system does not support WMA files of the following type: RDRM (Digital Rights Management) encrypted files RWMA Pro R5.1 surround sound

i Only use tracks with a data rate of at least 128 kbit/s and a sampling rate of at least 44.1 kHz. Lower rates can cause a noticeable deterioration in quality. This is especially the case if you have activated a surround sound function.

Selecting an active partition (USBmass storage devices only) You can select this function for USB storage devices if the storage device is partitioned. Up to nine partitions (primary or logical, FAT, FAT32, exFAT and NTFS) are supported. Selecting an active partition X Select a USB storage device (Y page 136). X To select Options in the media menu bar: turn and press the controller.

X Select Select Active Partition. Notes on copyright Audio or video files that you create or reproduce yourself for playback are generally subject to copyright protection. In many countries, reproductions, even for pri- vate use, are not permitted without the prior consent of the copyright holder.

138 Audio/video mode M ed ia

Make sure that you know about the applicable copyright regulations and that you comply with these.

Notes on CDs/DVDs ! Do not affix stickers or labels to the discs. They could peel off and damage the drive. The drive is designed to receive EN 60908standard discs. Therefore, you can only use discs with a maximum thickness of 1.3 mm. If you insert thicker discs, e.g. those that con- tain data on both sides (DVD on one side and audio data on the other), they cannot be ejec- ted and can damage the drive. Do not use discs with an 8 cm diameter, even when using an adapter. Only use round discs with a 12 cm diameter.

Discs with copy protection are not compatible with the audio CD standard and therefore may not be able to be played. Playback problems may occur when playing copied discs. Theremay be playback problems if you play CDs that you have copied yourself with a storage capacity of more than 700 MB.

Menu overview

: Main function bar ; Display for the active data medium = Media menu bar ? Title display in the media list A Current track and number in the track list B Numerical time display C Graphic time display D Album cover (if available)

Inserting and removing a disc from the single CD/DVD drive Inserting X Press the button on the single drive. If there is a disc already inserted, it will be ejected.

X Insert a disc into the disc slot with the printed side facing up. The drive closes and the disc is played. If the CD or DVD is started inmediamode, the corresponding display is shown. If the CD or DVD is started from another application (e.g. navigation), the display will not change. i The drive may not be able to play discs with copy protection.

Removing X Press the button. The drive ejects the disc.

X Take the disc out of the slot. If you do not take the disc out of the slot, it is drawn in again automatically after a short while.

Inserting a CD/DVD into the DVD changer

: Disc view ; Selected magazine tray = Magazine menu The DVD changer has a magazine with six trays. Inserting a CD/DVD into the magazine tray X Press the V button. Magazine menu= appears.

X To switch to disc view:: slide5 the con- troller.

Audio/video mode 139

M ed ia

Z

X To select the magazine tray: turn the control- ler and press to confirm.

or X Press number buttons (1-6) on the multime- dia system. The DVD changer switches to the selected magazine tray.

X When the Please insert disc 1.message appears: insert a disc into the disc slot with the printed side facing upwards.

Loading all empty magazine trays X To show the magazine menu: press the V button.

X To select Load Empty Slots: turn and press the controller. The multimedia system switches to the next empty magazine tray.

X When the Please insert disc 1.message appears: insert a disc into the disc slot with the printed side facing upwards. Once the disc is loaded, the DVD changer switches to the next empty tray. If insertion of the next disc takes too long, the disc inserted first will be played.

X Repeat these steps until all magazine trays are filled. The DVD changer plays the first inserted disc.

Exiting the DVD changer menu X Press the V button.

Ejecting a CD/DVD from the DVD changer

: Active ejection ; Disc name = Type of data medium If you remove one disc while playing another disc, the DVD changer interrupts playback. Play- back resumes after the disc is ejected.

Ejecting a single disc X To show the magazine menu: press the V button.

X To switch to the disc view: slide5 the con- troller. The current disc is marked.

X To select a disc: turn the controller and press to confirm.

or X Press number buttons (1-6) on the multime- dia system. The DVD changer ejects the disc.

X Take the disc out of the slot. Ejecting all CDs/DVDs X To show the magazine menu: press the V button.

X Select Eject All. The last active disc is ejected. The Please remove disc 1. message appears.

X Remove the disc. X Repeat the last step until the magazine is empty. If you take too long removing the disc, the disc is re-loaded.

Exiting a menu X Press the V button. or X Select% in the magazine menu.

Inserting/removing an SD card

Important safety notes

G WARNING SD cards are small parts. They can be swal- lowed and cause choking. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Keep the SD card out of the reach of children. If a SD card is swallowed, seek medical atten- tion immediately.

! If you are no longer using the SD card, you should remove it and store it outside the vehi- cle. High temperatures can damage the card.

The multimedia system supports SD cards (Secure Digital), SDHC cards (Secure Digital

140 Audio/video mode M ed ia

High Capacity), and SDXC cards (Secure Digital eXtended Capacity.

Inserting an SD card X Insert the SD card into the SD card slot on the control panel until the SD card engages. The side with the contacts must face down. The medium is played and the files are loaded in the background. If there are no supported audio or video files, you will see a message to this effect.

Removing an SD card X Press the SD card. The SD card is ejected.

X Remove the SD card.

Connecting USB devices Two USB ports are located in the stowage space under the armrest (Y page 136). X Connect the USB device with a suitable USB port. If the corresponding media menu is visible, the medium is played and the files are loaded in the background. Otherwise, the system does not automatically switch to USB. If there are no supported audio or video files, you will see a message to this effect.

i MP3 players must support Media Transfer Protocol (MTP).

Selecting the playback option X In media mode, slide6 the controller. The media menu bar is shown.

X To select Options: turn and press the con- troller.

Playing similar tracks i This option is available as soon as the music collection has been read and analyzed.

X To select Play More Like This: turn and press the controller.

Selecting Play mode X To select Playback Mode: press the control- ler.

X Select Normal Track Sequence . The current track list is played in the order it is stored on the data medium.

X Select Random Track List . The current track list is played in random order.

X Select Random Medium. All tracks on the data medium are played in random order.

Skipping to time X To select Skip to Time: turn and press the controller. A menu appears.

X To set the time: turn the controller. or X Set the desired time using the number key- pad.

Selecting an active partition X To select Select Active Partition: turn and press the controller. You can select a partition in the current USB data medium.

Showing track information X To switch the Show Track Information function on O or off : turn and press the controller. You display or hide information for Track, Artist and Album in the main display field. If the function is deactivated, the file name and the folder name of the track are dis- played.

Entering a track number directly X To enter the track number: press theg button. A menu appears.

X Use the number keypad to enter the desired track number. The track is played.

Audio/video mode 141

M ed ia

Z

Pausing/continuing playback X To pause playback: in audio or video mode, slide6 the controller. The media menu bar is shown.

X To select in the media menu bar: turn and press the controller. Playback is interrupted. The display changes to.

X To continue playback: in audio or video mode, slide6 the controller. The media menu bar is shown.

X To select in the media menu bar: turn and press the controller. Playback is continued from the point of inter- ruption. The symbol changes to.

Selecting a track

Selecting a track using the current track list X To display the current track list: press the controller when audio mode is active. The category list appears.

X Select Current Track List . X To select a track: turn the controller and press to confirm.

Selecting a track by skipping to a track X To skip forwards or backwards to a track: in audio mode, turn or briefly slide1 the controller.

or X Press theE orF button.

Fast-forwarding or rewinding a track X In audio mode, press and hold theE or F button until the desired position is reached.

Searching for a track X In Media mode, slide6 the controller. The media menu bar is shown.

X To select Search: turn and press the control- ler. The category list is shown.

X Select a category, e.g. Genres. After the category has been chosen, sub-cat- egories appear depending on the music tracks available.

X Select a sub-category, e.g. Rock. X Select a track in the sub-category for playing. All of the tracks in this sub-category are played.

Gracenote Media Database

General notes This function is available in CD, MP3 and iPod mode.

There is a version of Gracenote music recog- nition technology, Emeryville, California, USA on the hard disk of themultimedia system. Inmedia mode, you will recognize this by the logo in the bottom right-hand corner of the display. If the audio CD does not contain any CD text informa- tion, the multimedia system can use the Grace- note Media Database to identify unknown audio tracks when in CD mode. In addition, the cover arts for the main display field, the album list and the "Select by cover" function from the Gracenote Media Database are displayed for the music files and the iPod. This occurs when the cover art is not contained in the files but in the Gracenote Media Data- base.

Online prompt for metadata A connection to the Gracenote server is estab- lished automatically when an audio CD is inser- ted. The missing data is loaded, saved in the multimedia system and shown on the display. If the search formetadata is unsuccessful, no data can be displayed. If no phone is connected or configured for data use, this function is unavail- able. An Internet connection is required for this (Y page 122).

142 Audio/video mode M ed ia

Saving audio CDs

General notes i Store your audio CDs in a safe place. Any malfunction in the multimedia system may result in the loss of stored files. Mercedes- Benz is not liable for any loss of data.

No individual music tracks can be stored or deleted, only a maximum of twelve complete audio CDs. If twelve audio CDs are stored, the REC option in the Media menu bar is grayed out and has no function. One audio CD must be deleted before a new audio CD can be copied.

Copying an audio CD X Insert an audio CD. X In media mode, slide6 the controller. The media menu bar appears.

X To start the copying process: select REC by turning and pressing the controller.

X To select Start: press the controller. The copying procedure starts and is shown in the progress bar. It may take some time for the copying process to be completed, depending on the amount of data. Once the copying process is completed, a message appears.

X To cancel copying: select Cancel. The files copied up to the point of cancellation are lost.

i During the copying process, you can switch to another function (e.g. radio) or to another media source (e.g. USB). The copying proce- dure continues in the background. It is how- ever not possible to select another CD in the CD changer.

Playing stored audio CDs X In Media mode, slide6 the controller. The media menu bar appears.

X To select Search: turn and press the control- ler. The category list appears.

X To select Stored Audio CDs in the category list: turn and press the controller. A selection list for the copied audio CDs is displayed.

X To select the desired audio CD: turn and press the controller. The track list is displayed.

X To select a track: turn the controller and press to confirm.

The tracks on the stored audio CDs can also be found and played using other media search functions (Y page 143).

Deleting stored audio CDs If music is being played from the saved audio CDs, the function for deleting audio CDs is avail- able. X In media mode, slide6 the controller. The media menu bar appears.

X To select Options: turn and press the con- troller.

X To select Delete Stored Audio CDs: press the controller. A selection list for the stored audio CDs is displayed.

X To select the desired audio CD: turn and press the controller. The audio CD is deleted.

Media search

General notes Themultimedia system plays back files from the following data media: RDisc (CD/DVD) RMemory card RUSB storage device RApple devices The categories are displayed according to the data available. A database is created for the iPod and a database is created for all of the other media sources (CD, USB, SD card). During the search the relevant database is accessed depending on the active media source.

Starting the media search X In Media mode, slide6 the controller.

Media search 143

M ed ia

Z

The media menu bar appears. X To select Search: turn and press the control- ler. The category list appears.

Category list X In Media mode, slide6 the controller. The media menu bar is shown.

X To select Search: turn and press the control- ler. The category list is shown.

Depending on the connectedmedia sources and files, the following categories are listed: RCurrent Track List RFolder RSelect By Cover RKeyword Search RPlaylists RArtists RAlbums RTracks RGenres RYear RComposers RStored Audio CDs RVideos RPhotos i The categories are available as soon as the entire media content has been read and ana- lyzed. If the same device is reconnected with unchanged media content, these categories are available more quickly. When connecting Apple devices, the cate- gories Folder, Year and Photos are not available.

Searching a track using the current track list X To select Current Track List in the cate- gory list: turn and press the controller (Y page 144). The selection list appears.

X Select the required track.

Searching for a track via a folder Playable files can be searched for in the active data medium's directories. X To select Folder in the category list: turn and press the controller (Y page 144). The folder list appears.

X Select the required folder. Either the desired track list appears or con- tinue searching in the folder directory until the desired track list has been found.

X Select the required track.

Searching for a track via cover view X To select Select By Cover in the category list: turn and press the controller (Y page 144). A menu with cover views appears.

X Select the required cover. Track playback is started automatically. i There is a database for iPod and for each of the other media sources (CD, USB, SD card). During the search the relevant database is accessed depending on the active media source.

Searching for a track via music genre X To select Genres in the category list: turn and press the controller (Y page 144). The multimedia system searches in all media sources. A selection list withGenre andmedia sources appears.

X Select the desired music genre. A selection list with music tracks from the selected genre appears.

X Select a music track. The track is played. The display for the active media source is shown.

X To exit the selection list: press the% but- ton. i The list is closed automatically once a selec- tion has been made.

Searching for a track via a keyword X To select Keyword Search in the category list: turn and press the controller (Y page 144).

144 Media search M ed ia

The input field appears. X To select the required characters: turn and press the controller for each one (Y page 29). Entering just part of the name of a track or artist is enough. The search result then dis- plays the entire text.

X Select . The search results are displayed. The numbers behind the results, for exampleArtists (1/0), mean: 1 result that contains the exact keyword searched for and 0 results are similar.

X Select one of the results. Keywords that have already been searched for are displayed in the "Search history" with- out having to enter them completely. They can be accepted directly and displayed in the search result.

X Select one entry, e.g. Artists. The tracks are listed.

X Select a track. Playback starts. i If available, the album list and covers are shown.

i There is a database for iPod and for each of the other media sources (CD, USB, SD card). During the search the relevant database is accessed depending on the active media source.

Bluetooth audio mode

Requirements The Bluetooth function must be activated in the multimedia system (Y page 41). Bluetooth audio mode requires a Bluetooth- capable audio device. Check your Bluetooth audio device for the fol- lowing; see the manufacturer's operating instructions: RBluetooth audio profile The Bluetooth audio device must support the A2DP and AVRCP Bluetooth audio pro- files. RBluetooth visibility Certain Bluetooth audio devices do not just require activation of the Bluetooth function.

In addition, your device must be made "visi- ble" to other devices. RBluetooth device name This device name is predetermined but can usually be changed. For a clear selection of the Bluetooth device, we recommend that you customize the device name.

i A2DP (AdvancedAudioDistributionProfile): Bluetooth audio profile for audio data trans- mission AVRCP (Audio Video Remote Control Profile): Bluetooth audio profile for audio data play- back

i The Bluetooth devicemust be visible to the multimedia system for authorization. After authorization, the multimedia system even finds the Bluetooth device when it is not visible.

General notes Before using your Bluetooth audio device with themultimedia system for the first time, you will need to authorize it. When you authorize a new Bluetooth audio device, it is connected automatically. Connec- tion involves first searching for a Bluetooth audio device and then authorizing it. You can authorize up to 15 Bluetooth devices.

i If you authorize a mobile phone that sup- ports Bluetooth audio, the A2DP and AVRCP Bluetooth audio profiles are connected automatically. The mobile phone is then entered: Rin the Bluetooth telephone list (Y page 92) Rin the Bluetooth audio device list (Y page 146)

Mercedes-Benz recommends authorizing a mobile phone in Bluetooth telephony (Y page 93).

Bluetooth audio mode 145

M ed ia

Z

Bluetooth audio menu

: Audio transmission status (depending on the Bluetooth audio device, also title name and artist)

; Data medium position in the media list = Sound settings ? Media sources A To stop or start playback B Name of the connected Bluetooth audio

device (example) C Options menu X To show the menu bar: slide6 the control- ler.

Switching to Bluetooth audio X Press the button. X To select Bluetooth Audio in themenu: turn and press the controller. The multimedia system activates the Blue- tooth audio device. The Bluetooth Audio menu then appears (Y page 146). Playback starts. If you see the No Bluetooth Audio DeviceAuthorized message, you will need to authorize the Bluetooth audio device first (Y page 146).

i If the connected Bluetooth audio device supports metadata and if the corresponding data is available, then the artist, track and album name can be displayed.

Searching for and authorizing a Blue- tooth audio device Searching for a Bluetooth audio device X Switch on Bluetooth audio mode (Y page 146).

X Slide6 the controller. The media menu bar appears.

X To select Options: turn and press the con- troller.

X To select Bluetooth Audio Devices: press the controller. A new menu appears.

X To select Search for Audio Devices: press the controller. A message appears.

X Select Start Search. The multimedia system searches for Blue- tooth audio devices within range and adds them to the Bluetooth device list. The duration of the search depends on the number of Bluetooth audio devices within range and their characteristics.

: Bluetooth audio device within range and already authorized

; Newly detected mobile phone with Blue- tooth audio mode in range

The Bluetooth device list displays all author- ized devices, whether they are within range or not. After a device search, devices which are within range but not authorized are also dis- played. If the multimedia system cannot find your Blue- tooth audio device, external authorization may follow (Y page 147).

146 Bluetooth audio mode M ed ia

Authorizing a Bluetooth audio device X Select a Bluetooth audio device that has not yet been authorized from the list: turn and press the controller. Authorization starts. Depending on which Bluetooth audio device is being used, the device can be authorized either by entering a passkey or by Secure Simple Pairing. You can find information on this in the "Authorizing (connecting) a mobile phone" section (Y page 93). After successful authorization, the Blue- tooth audio device is connected and starts playing. i With some Bluetooth audio devices, play- back must initially be started on the device itself, so that the multimedia system can play the audio data. For the audio device used, the output of the audio files has to be specified via Bluetooth.

i The Bluetooth audio device must support Bluetooth version 2.1 for connection via Secure Simple Pairing. The multimedia sys- tem creates a six-digit code which is dis- played simultaneously on both devices that are to be connected. For some Bluetooth audio devices, the pair- ing must also be confirmed within 10 sec- onds.

External authorization If the multimedia system does not find your Bluetooth audio device, this may be due to particular security settings on your Bluetooth audio device. In this case, check whether your Bluetooth audio device can locate the multi- media system. The Bluetooth device name of the multimedia system is MB Bluetooth. X Switch on Bluetooth audio mode (Y page 146).

X Slide6 the controller. The media menu bar appears.

X To select Options: turn and press the con- troller.

X To select Bluetooth Audio Devices: press the controller. A new menu appears.

X To select Connect via Audio Device: turn and press the controller. A message appears.

X Start the authorization on your Bluetooth audio device (see the manufacturer's operat- ing instructions). After successful authorization, the Blue- tooth audio device is connected and starts playing.

With some Bluetooth audio devices, playback must initially be started on the device itself, so that the multimedia system can play the audio data.

Displaying details X To select a Bluetooth audio device from the Bluetooth device list: turn the controller (Y page 146).

X To selectG: slide9 the controller. X To select Details: turn and press the con- troller. The following information concerning the selected mobile phone is shown: RBluetooth name RBluetooth address RAvailability status (shown after an update) RAuthorization status

Closing the detailed display X Wait for a few seconds. or X Press the% button.

Starting/stopping playback Requirement: the Bluetooth audio menu (Y page 146) is shown. Starting playback X To select: turn and press the controller. Playback starts. is selected.

Stopping playback X Select. A message appears. is selected.

Continuing playback X Select. A message appears. is selected.

Bluetooth audio mode 147

M ed ia

Z

Starting playback if the Bluetooth audio device has been stopped During the search for mobile phones (Y page 92), the connection with the Bluetooth audio device is terminated. The No BluetoothAudio Device Connectedmessage appears in the Bluetooth audio menu (Y page 146). When the search is finished, the Bluetooth audio device can be reconnected. X To confirm the Connect Last Used Player message: press the controller. Depending on the Bluetooth audio device used, playback starts immediately or you must start playback manually. In this case, you will see the BluetoothAudio Device Paused message.

X To select Start playback:: slide6 and press the controller. Playback resumes from the beginning.

Selecting a track The function is not supported by all Bluetooth audio devices. Some mobile phones impair function with regard to the following criteria: Rthe number of tracks that can be selected. Rthe timeperiod until the next or previous track is played.

X Use the multifunction steering wheel to switch to the media menu in the on-board computer; see the vehicle Operator'sManual.

X To skip forward or back to a track: press the9 or: button on the multifunction steering wheel.

X To rapid scroll: press and hold the9 or: button on the multifunction steering wheel until the desired track is reached. If you press and hold the9 or: but- tons, the rapid scrolling speed increases after a short time.

Further ways to select tracks (Y page 142).

i In rapid scroll, track names are not shown, but instead only Track 1, Track 2 etc. The playback times for the tracks played are not displayed. This is available as an optional function starting with AVRCP Version 1.3. There is also nomusic search option available with Bluetooth Audio.

Playback options

General information If the Bluetooth audio device supports the cor- responding function, the following options are available: RNormal Track Sequence: the tracks are played in the normal order (e.g. track 1, 2, 3 etc.). Audio data playback is determined by the order in which the tracks are written to the data medium. Alphabetical order is the most common. Once all the tracks in a folder have been played, the tracks in the next folder are played. RRandom Track List: the current track list is played in random order (e.g. 3, 8, 5 etc.). RRandom Medium: all tracks on the data medium are played in random order (e.g. track 3, 8, 5 etc.). Playback options are optional functions and are not, or only partially, supported by Blue- tooth audio devices.

Selecting the playback option X Slide6 the controller. X To select Options : turn and press the con- troller.

X Select Playback Mode . A # dot indicates the current setting.

X Select the desired option.

Increasing the volume in themultime- dia system X In the Bluetooth Audiomenu (Y page 146), slide6 the controller.

X To select Options : turn and press the con- troller.

X To select Volume: turn and press the control- ler. A menu appears. The # dot indicates the cur- rent setting.

X Select Standard or Boost . i If playback on the Bluetooth audio player is too quiet, the Boost function may be used. It is recommended, however, that you increase the volume on the Bluetooth audio device directly.

148 Bluetooth audio mode M ed ia

Reconnecting a Bluetooth audio device

General notes The Bluetooth audio profiles are connected automatically under the following circumstan- ces: Rone of the last two mobile phones to have been connected has also been used as a Blue- tooth audio device (if the function is sup- ported by the mobile phone). Rthe mobile phone is automatically connected. The Bluetooth audio device is then connec- ted.

i For an automatic connection with the mul- timedia system, the mobile phone must be within range. Formost Bluetooth audio devices, the "auto- matic connection" must be activated by tick- ing a box. Depending on the device used, this prompt often occurs during authorization (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).

Connecting Bluetooth audio devices If the No Bluetooth Audio Device Connected message appears, you have two options to reconnect the Bluetooth audio device. Option 1: X To confirm the Connect Last Used Player message: press the controller. If the multimedia system can locate the Blue- tooth audio device, it will be connected and start playing.

Option 2: X Slide6 the controller. The media menu bar appears.

X To select Options: turn and press the con- troller.

X To select Bluetooth Audio Devices: press the controller. A new menu appears.

X To select a Bluetooth audio device: turn and press the controller. If the Bluetooth audio device has been authorized, playback starts.

Bluetooth audio device and simulta- neous search for mobile phones i When searching for amobile phone or a new Bluetooth audio device, the connection to an already activated Bluetooth audio device is separated (Y page 92).

In the Bluetooth audio basic display, you will see the No Bluetooth Audio Device Connected message, and the displayed ConnectLast Used Player message cannot be selec- ted.

De-authorizing (deregistering) a Blue- tooth audio device X To select a Bluetooth audio device from the Bluetooth device list: turn the controller (Y page 146).

X To selectG: slide9 the controller. X To select Deauthorize: press the controller. A prompt appears asking whether you really wish to de-authorize this device.

X To select Yes: turn and press the controller. The device is deleted from the Bluetooth device list. i Before re-authorizing the Bluetooth audio device, you should also delete the device name MB Bluetooth from your Bluetooth audio device's Bluetooth list (see the man- ufacturer's operating instructions).

Operation with the Media Interface

General notes Media Interface is a universal interface for the connection of mobile audio and video devices. Media Interface in the multimedia system has two USB connections. The USB ports are located in the stowage com- partment under the armrest (Y page 136).

Operation with the Media Interface 149

M ed ia

Z

Media interface menu

: Main function bar ; Display for the active data medium = Media menu bar ? Title display in the media list A Current track and number in the track list B Numerical time display C Graphic time display D Additional display area with cover view

Switching to Media Interface X Connect the data medium to USB port 1 or USB port 2 (Y page 141).

X Select the basicmenu forMedia Interface 1 or Media Interface 2 (Y page 137). If playable media files are found, they will be played by the multimedia system.

Supported devices The following data media can be connected to the multimedia system via Media Interface: RiPod RiPhone RMP3 RUSB devices

i iPod and iPhone are registered trade- marks of Apple Inc., Cupertino, California, USA.

For details and a list of supported devices, visit our website at http://www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/. Then follow the instructions in the "Media Inter- face" section. Or call theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes

(1-800-367-6372) (for the USA) or Customer Relations at 1-800-387-0100 (for Canada).

Supported data formats

Music MP3, WMA, AAC

Video MPEG, WMV, MOV, AVI, MP4

Images JPG, JPEG, BMP, PNG

i Video files from Apple devices cannot be played.

Selecting a music file

Selecting with the controller X To display the current track list: press the controller in the media interface menu.

X Select Current Track List. The track list for the active data medium appears.

X To select a track: turn the controller and press to confirm.

X To skip forwards or backwards to a track: turn the controller in the media interface menu. The selected track is played.

Fast-forwarding or rewinding a track X With the media source active in the media interface, slide1 the controller and hold it until the desired position has been reached.

Searching for a track

Overview The following categories are listed: RCurrent Track List RFolder RSelect By Cover RKeyword Search RPlaylists RArtists RAlbums

150 Operation with the Media Interface M ed ia

RTracks RGenres RYear RComposers RVideos RPhotos RAudiobooks RPodcasts i The functions are available as soon as the entire media content has been read and ana- lyzed. If the same device is reconnected with unchanged media content, these functions are available more quickly. The audio books and podcasts categories are only available for Apple devices. When connecting Apple devices, the cate- gories Folder, Year, "Videos" and Pho- tos are not available.

Searching for a track X Slide6 the controller. The media menu bar appears.

X To select Search: turn and press the control- ler. The category list appears.

X To select a category, e.g. Current TrackList: turn and press the controller. A selection list appears.

X Select the required track. Using the keyword search X Enter and confirm the characters of the desired search using the controller (Y page 144). Search results are sorted according to the available categories, displayed and can then be selected.

Selecting the playback option X In media mode, slide6 the controller. The media menu bar is shown.

X To select Options: turn and press the con- troller.

X Select the playback option (Y page 141). i The Play More Like This option is also available for Apple devices. For this, the

Genius functionality must be activated in iTunes. Then synchronization of the device with iTunes must be carried out again.

Selecting video settings Video files from Apple devices cannot be played. If playable video files are found, they will be played by the multimedia system. X To activate full-screen mode: press the con- troller in the Media Interface menu.

X To show the video menu: slide6 the con- troller in full-screen mode.

X Select Menu. The Media Interface menu bar appears.

X To select Options: turn and press the con- troller.

X Select Video Settings. Making settings (Y page 153)

Video DVD mode

Important safety notes

G WARNING The CD/DVD drive is a class 1 laser product. If you open the housing of the CD/DVD drive, there is a risk of exposure to invisible laser radiation. This laser radiation could damage your retina. There is a risk of injury. Never open the housing. Always have main- tenance and repair work carried out at a quali- fied specialist workshop.

G WARNING If you handle a disc while driving, you may be distracted from the traffic situation. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only handle a disc when the vehicle is sta- tionary.

Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h) your vehicle covers a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second.

Video DVD mode 151

M ed ia

Z

General notes

Notes on discs ! Do not affix stickers or labels to the discs. They could peel off and damage the drive. The drive is designed to receive EN 60908standard discs. Therefore, you can only use discs with a maximum thickness of 1.3 mm. If you insert thicker discs, e.g. those that con- tain data on both sides (DVD on one side and audio data on the other), they cannot be ejec- ted and can damage the drive. Do not use discs with an 8 cm diameter, even when using an adapter. Only use round discs with a 12 cm diameter.

The variety of discs, burners and burn software available means there is no guarantee that the multimedia systemwill be able to play discs that you have burned yourself.

DVD playback conditions The multimedia system can play back video DVDs produced according to the following standards: RRegion code 1 or region code 0 (no region code) RPAL or NTSC standard You will generally find the relevant details either on the DVD itself or on the DVD case. With DVDs that do not meet the standard requirements, you may encounter playback problems.

i Observe the following notes: RThe multimedia system is set to region code 1 at the factory. This setting can be changed at a qualified specialist workshop. The region code can be changed up to five times. RIf the region code is changed at the work- shop, video DVDs with another region code can also be played. If you insert a video DVD with a different region code, a mes- sage to this effect appears. RIf a DVD cannot be played back according to national color transfer methods (PAL or NTSC standards), problemswith the image, sound or playback may occur.

Control options There are various control menus available in DVD video mode. Most DVDs have their own control menu. The DVD's control menu is operated directly using the controller or DVD functions.

Control menu and function

Operation

RDVD's control menu Selection of title, scene, language, subtitles ...

Operation with the controller

RMenuOptions Selection of bright- ness, contrast, color, format

Operation using the menu bar Options, video settings

RVideo menu Selection of scene, fast forward or rewind

In full-screen mode, slide6 the control- ler

RDVD functions Selection of title, scene, language, subtitles ...

In full-screen mode, press the controller

Function restrictions Depending on the DVD, certain functions or actions may not function at all. The symbolK appears in the display.

Switching on video DVD mode X Insert a DVD into the single DVD drive (Y page 139).

X Insert a DVD into the DVD changer (Y page 139).

Further options for switching on: RUsing the number keypad (Y page 137) RUsing the main function bar (Y page 136) RUsing the device list (Y page 137) RUsing the button (Y page 136)

152 Video DVD mode M ed ia

Showing the Disc menu

: Main function bar ; Main display field = Media menu bar The Disc menu can be shown in the following situations: X To show the DVD menu: press the% button.

X To show in the video DVD currently play- ing: slide6 the controller. The video menu appears.

X Press the controller. The Disc menu appears.

Switching on DVD full-screen mode You can change from the menu to full-screen mode as follows: X Slide5 the controller. The main function bar and menu bar are hid- den. A full-screen symbol will be shown.

X Press the controller. The full-screen mode appears.

Selecting video settings

Setting the picture format The following options are available for the screen format for the DVD being played: RAutomatic R16:9 R4:3 RZoom

X In full-screen mode, slide6 the controller The video menu appears.

X Press the controller. The Disc menu appears.

X To select Options in the menu bar: turn and press the controller.

X Select Video Settings. X To set the picture format: turn and press the controller. The dot before the menu entry shows the selected format.

Manual image enhancement X In full-screen mode, slide6 the controller The video menu appears.

X Press the controller. The Disc menu appears.

X To select Options in the menu bar: turn and press the controller.

X Select Video Settings. X To select Brightness , Contrast orColor : turn and press the controller. A sliding menu appears.

X To select the required value: turn the control- ler.

X To exit the slidingmenu: slide8 the con- troller.

Showing the DVD's control menu Most DVDs have their own control menu which can be operated using the controller. Showing the DVD's control menu X To show the DVD overlay menu: in full-screen video mode, press the controller. The DVD overlay menu is shown.

X To select Menu from the DVD overlay menu: turn and press the controller. The menu of the DVD overlay menu is hidden and the DVD's menu entries (e.g. scenes, lan- guage, trailers) are displayed.

X To select a menu entry: slide and press the controller.

Video DVD mode 153

M ed ia

Z

Operating the video menu

: Type of data medium ; Current title = Shows the menu bars for the DVD basic dis-

play ? Current scene A Track time Operating the video menu X To show: in full-screen video mode, slide6 the controller.

X To hide: slide5 the controller. X To select the next or previous scene: turn the controller clockwise/counter-clockwise.

X To fast forward or rewind: slide1 the controller and hold until the desired position has been reached.

X To hide the video menu: slide5 the con- troller.

X To show the menu bars for the DVD basic dis- play: press the controller. The video menu is hidden and the DVD basic menu appears.

DVD functions

Showing/hiding the DVD functions X To show the DVD overlay menu: in full-screen video mode, press the controller. The DVD overlay menu is shown.

X To hide: select% in the DVD overlay menu.

X To show theDVDbasic display: select in the DVD overlay menu.

Overview of DVD overlay menu

: Activates DVD control menu ; Hides DVD overlay menu = Shows the DVD basic display ? Confirms entry in control menu A Navigates DVD lists B Jumps to the start of the scene C Displays camera perspectives D Shows subtitles E Selects language F Stop function G Pause function

Operating theDVD's ownmenuwith the DVD overlay menu X In full-screen mode, press the controller The DVD overlay menu is shown. It is possible to navigatewithin the DVD's own control menu using the arrows in the upper bar of the DVD overlay menu.

X To select the XZY arrow to navigate in the DVD's own menu: turn the controller. The active arrow is highlighted.

X To select the arrow: press the controller. The next menu entry in the direction of the arrow is highlighted.

X To select from the DVD overlay menu: turn and press the controller. The selected DVD scene is played.

X To hide the DVD overlay menu: select& using the controller.

X Press the controller. The DVD overlay menu is hidden.

If functions such as Display camera perspec- tives are available on the DVD, these functions are shown in the DVD overlay menu.

154 Video DVD mode M ed ia

Stopping playback X In full-screen mode, press the controller The DVD overlay menu is shown.

X To stop playback: select. X To start playback again: select. Playback restarts from the beginning.

Pausing playback X In full-screen mode, press the controller The DVD overlay menu is shown.

X To pause playback Select. The display changes to.

X To continue playback: select.

Selecting a scene/chapter

If the film is divided into scenes and chapters, you can select these directly while the film is running or you can skip progressively through them. This is not possible at certain points for some DVDs (e.g. during the opening credits). It may also be possible to select the scene and chapter from the functions stored on the DVD. X To skip forward or back: in the video menu, turn the controller.

or X Press theE orF button. The next or previous scene in the film is skip- ped to.

Picture viewer

General notes If pictures are stored on a connected medium (except on Apple devices), you can view these on the multimedia system. The following data media and picture formats are supported: RDatamedia:CD,DVD, USBdevices, SD cards R Picture formats: jpeg, jpg, bmp, png The maximum image resolution is 20megapixels for JPEG, JPG and 1.5megapixels for BMP, PNG.

Displaying pictures X In media mode, slide6 the controller. X To select Search: turn and press the control- ler. The category list appears.

X To select Photos: turn and press the control- ler. A directory list appears. Folders and picture files can be shown.

X Select a folder or picture. If there is no picture on the data medium, an empty list is shown.

Searching for pictures on other data media X You can search for pictures on other data media. In the directory list, slide8 the controller. The device list appears.

X To select a data medium with picture files: turn the controller and press to confirm. A directory list appears. Folders and picture files can be shown.

X Select a folder or picture.

Starting a slide show X While viewing a picture, press the controller. The image menu appears.

X To select Start Slideshow: turn and press the controller. The slide show starts.

X To end the slide show: press the controller. The image menu appears.

X Select End Slide Show .

Changing the picture view X Press the controller. The image menu appears.

X To select Turn Clockwise : turn and press the controller. The picture rotates 90 degrees clockwise.

X Select Turn Counterclockwise . The picture rotates 90 degrees counter-clock- wise.

X Select Zoom In. The size of the picture increases.

Picture viewer 155

M ed ia

Z

After you have zoomed into the picture, you can move the section of the picture.

X Tomove the section of the picture: slide4 and1 the controller.

X To revert to the original size: press the con- troller.

or X Press the% button.

Closing the picture viewer X Press the controller. X To select Close Picture Viewer : turn and press the controller. The multimedia system returns to the last accessed media mode.

156 Picture viewer M ed ia

Your multimedia system equipment

These operating instructions describe all the standard and optional equipment of your multi- media system, as available at the time of going to press. Country-specific differences are pos- sible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not feature all functions described here. This also applies to safety-relevant systems and func- tions. Read the information on qualified specialist workshops in the vehicle Operator's Manual.

Sound settings

Calling up the sound menu You can select various sound settings for the different audio and video sources. It is possible to set more bass for radio mode than for CD mode, for example. The respective sound menu can be called up from the menu of the desired mode. X Switch to radio mode (Y page 128). or X Switch to media mode (Y page 136). X To display the menu bars: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select: turn and press the controller. The menu appears with the last setting accessed, e.g. Equalizer.

Sound menu overview

Function Options

Equalizer Sets treble, mid- range and bass

Balance/fader Adjusts the volume: right/left and front/rear

Setting treble, mid-range and bass X Call up the sound menu (Y page 157). X Turn the controller until Equalizer is brought to the front.

X To activate rotarymenus for treble, mid-range and bass: slide6 the controller.

X To switch between the rotary menus: slide 8 or9 the controller.

X To make the desired settings: turn the con- troller. Rotary menus show the set values.

X To return to the sound menu: slide5 the controller.

X To return to media mode: press the% but- ton.

Adjusting the balance/fader Balance adjusts the volume left and right. Fader adjusts the volume in front and rear. For the best sound, setting 0 is recommended. X Call up the sound menu (Y page 157). X Turn the controller until Balance/Fader is brought to the front and then slide6 the controller.

X To activate the menu for balance and fader: press the controller.

X To adjust the balance: slide8 or9 the controller.

X To adjust the fader: slide6 or5 the con- troller.

X To return to the sound menu: press the% button.

X To return to media mode: press the% but- ton.

Harman/kardon Logic 7 surround sound system

General notes The harman/kardon Logic7 surround sound system is available for all functions in the radio and media modes. The harman/kardon Logic7 surround sound system is available for the following operating modes: RRadio (FM only) RSatellite radio RAudio CD RMP3 (including SD card and USB storage device) RMedia Interface RBluetooth audio mode RVideo DVD (PCM, DTS and Dolby Digital audio formats)

Harman/kardon Logic 7 surround sound system 157

So un d

i For the best sound, CD or the WAV audio format is recommended. For data-reduced media, the AAC audio format with a data rate of 320 kbit/s is recommended.

Discs which support the audio formats men- tioned have the following logos:

i Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

i For DTS patents see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, the Symbol & DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks, and DTS Digital Surround is a trademark of DTS, Inc. DTS, Inc. All rights reserved.

Calling up the sound menu You can select various sound settings for the different audio and video sources. It is possible to set more bass for radio mode than for CD mode, for example. The respective sound menu is called up from the menu of the desired mode. X Switch to radio mode (Y page 128). or X Switch to media mode (Y page 136). X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select: turn and press the controller. The menu appears with the last setting accessed, e.g. Equalizer.

Overviewof harman/kardon Logic7 surround sound system

Function Options

Equalizer Sets treble, mid- range and bass

Balance/fader Adjusts the volume: right/left and front/rear

Logic 7 Optimizes the sound playback

Setting treble, mid-range and bass X Call up the sound menu (Y page 158). X Turn the controller until Equalizer is in the center.

X To activate rotarymenus for treble, mid-range and bass: slide6 the controller.

X To switch between the rotary menus: slide 8 or9 the controller.

X To make the desired settings: turn the con- troller. The rotary menus show the set values.

X To return to the sound menu: slide5 the controller.

X To return to media mode: press the% but- ton.

Adjusting the balance/fader Balance adjusts the volume left and right. Fader adjusts the volume in front and rear. For the best sound, setting 0 is recommended. X Call up the sound menu (Y page 158). X Turn the controller until Balance/Fader is in the center.

X Slide6 the controller. X To activate the menu for balance and fader: press the controller.

X To adjust the balance: slide8 or9 the controller.

X To adjust the fader: slide6 or5 the con- troller. An image shows the sound focus set.

158 Harman/kardon Logic 7 surround sound system So un d

X To return to the sound menu: press the% button.

X To return to media mode: press the% but- ton.

Setting surround sound The Logic7 setting optimizes the sound play- back. X Call up the sound menu (Y page 158). X Turn the controller until Logic7 is in the cen- ter.

X Slide6 the controller. The left-hand rotary menu to switch surround sound on and off is activated.

X To switch Logic7 on or off: turn the control- ler.

X To return to the menu: slide5 the control- ler.

X To return to media mode: press the% but- ton.

For the optimum audio experience for all pas- sengers when Logic7 is switched on, the bal- ance settings should be set to the center of the vehicle interior. MP3 tracks should have a data rate of at least 128 kbit/s. Surround sound playback does not function for mono signal sources, such as for AM radio mode. If radio reception is poor, e.g. in a tunnel, you should switch off Logic7, since it may other- wise switch dynamically between stereo and mono and cause temporary sound distortions.

Bang & Olufsen BeoSound

General notes The Bang & Olufsen BeoSound AMG sound sys- tem is available for all functions in the radio and media modes. The followingmodes are available for the Bang & Olufsen BeoSound AMG sound system: RRadio (FM only) RSatellite radio RAudio CD RMP3/AAC RMedia Interface

RBluetooth audio mode RVideo DVD (PCM, DTS and Dolby Digital audio formats)

i For the best sound, CD or the WAV audio format is recommended. For data-reduced media, the AAC audio format with a data rate of 320 kbit/s is recommended.

i Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

i For DTS patents see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, the Symbol & DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks, and DTS Digital Surround is a trademark of DTS, Inc. DTS, Inc. All rights reserved.

Calling up the sound menu You can select various sound settings for the different audio and video sources. It is possible to set more bass for radio mode than for CD mode, for example. The respective sound menu is called up from the menu of the desired mode. X Switch to radio mode (Y page 128). or X Switch to media mode (Y page 136). X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select: turn and press the controller. The menu appears with the last setting accessed, e.g. Equalizer.

Bang & Olufsen BeoSound 159

So un d

Bang & Olufsen BeoSound AMG sound system

Function Options

Equalizer Sets treble, mid- range and bass

Balance/fader Adjusts the volume: right/left and front/rear

True Image Sets a sound profile in the vehicle

Sound mode (VIP &BAL Selection) Optimizes the sound playback

Setting treble, mid-range and bass X Call up the sound menu (Y page 159). X Turn the controller until Equalizer is in the center.

X Slide6 the controller. Rotary menus for treble, mid-range and bass are activated.

X To switch between the rotary menus: slide 8 or9 the controller.

X Tomake the desired Equalizer settings: turn the controller. The rotary menus show the set values.

X To return to the menu: slide5 the control- ler.

X To return to media mode: press the% but- ton.

Adjusting the balance/fader Balance adjusts the volume left and right. Fader adjusts the volume in front and rear. For the best sound, setting 0 is recommended. X Call up the sound menu (Y page 159). X Turn the controller until Balance/Fader is in the center.

X Slide6 the controller. X To activate the menu for balance and fader: press the controller.

X To adjust the balance focus: slide8 or 9 the controller.

X To adjust the fader focus: slide6 or5 the controller.

X To return to the sound menu: press the% button.

X To return to media mode: press the% but- ton.

Setting the sound profile With the Sound Profile setting, you can select between two defined sound settings.

Sound profiles Description

Reference High-end sound set- ting for faithful audio playback

Surround Optimum setting for LIVE and concert recordings

X Call up the sound menu (Y page 159). X Turn the controller until Sound Profile is in the center.

X Slide6 the controller. The rotary menu to select the sound profile is activated.

X To select Sound Profile : turn the controller until the desired sound profile is activated.

X To return to the menu: slide5 the control- ler.

X To return to media mode: press the% but- ton.

Sound playback for individual seats For the best sound, the specific seats will need to be set. X Call up the sound menu (Y page 159). X Turn the controller until VIP & BAL Selection is in the center. X Slide6 the controller. The rotary menu is activated.

X To set the desired VIP & BAL Selection : turn the controller. The segment, text and image show the selec- ted setting.

X To return to the sound menu: slide5 the controller.

X To return to media mode: press the% but- ton.

160 Bang & Olufsen BeoSound So un d

Your multimedia system equipment

These operating instructions describe all the standard and optional equipment of your multi- media system, as available at the time of going to press. Country-specific differences are pos- sible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not feature all functions described here. This also applies to safety-relevant systems and func- tions. Read the information on qualified specialist workshops in the vehicle Operator's Manual.

Weather forecasts

Introduction This function is currently not available for Can- ada. For the reception of weather forecasts via sat- ellite radio, you will need a SIRIUS XM Satellite Weather subscription. When prompted, have the weather service acti- vated by phone. A message shows the SIRIUS telephone number and the SIRIUS device iden- tification number. X To select Call or Cancel: turn and press the controller. If a mobile phone is connected to the multi- media system (Y page 91), when you selectCall, a call is placed to a member of the SIR- IUS service staff. The ID number of the SIRIUS device will be transferred to the telephone display.

X This will be followed by instructions from the service employee.

The multimedia system can receive weather forecasts for the USA (including Alaska and Hawaii) via satellite radio. The received weather data can be displayed as an information chart (daily forecast, five-day forecast, detailed information) or on the weather map. The weather data received from the weather station is stored for one hour in the multimedia system. It can therefore be displayed again immediately after restarting the engine (for example after refueling).

Depending on which scale has been selected, the weather map can display the following weather data with symbols: Rprecipitation radar The precipitation radar cannot be displayed for Alaska, Hawaii and Puerto Rico. Rstorm characteristics Rhigh and low-pressure areas, weather fronts Rcourse of tropical cyclones (hurricanes, typhoons) Rstorm warnings Rwind direction and speeds

i Hurricane: term used to describe the tropi- cal cyclones that primarily develop in the Atlantic, North Pacific and South Pacific oceans. The wind speeds are above 74 mph (118 km/h). Five categories are used to clas- sify the strength of a hurricane. Typhoon: term used to describe a tropical cyclone that develops in the northwestern Pacific. Thewind speeds are in the category of a hurricane.

Switching the SIRIUSWeather display on/off

Activating

X Press the % button. X To select Tel/ in the main function bar: slide5, turn and press the controller. A menu appears.

X To select SIRIUS Weather: turn and press the controller. The information chart shows the daily fore- cast at the current vehicle position.

Weather forecasts 161

SI RI US

W ea th er

You see the following information: Rthe date and time of the weather message received last Rinformation on the current weather (temper- ature, cloud coverage) and a forecast for the next three, six and twelve hours Rthe current highest temperature and fore- casts Rthe current lowest temperature and forecasts Rthe probability of rain X To switch to the 5-day forecast: select Current. A menu appears.

X Select 5-Day. The information chart displays the forecast for the next five days in the currently selected location.

X To return to the current-day forecast: select 5-Day. A menu appears.

X Select Current. The information chart shows the forecast for the current day again.

Deactivating X Press%.

Displaying detailed information

Besides the current temperatures, you can dis- play information such as wind speeds and UV index. X To select Current or 5-Day in the current-day or 5-day forecast: turn and press the control- ler. A menu appears.

X Select Info. The information chart shows detailed infor- mation for the selected area.

Selecting the area for the weather forecast

Introduction You can select the weather forecasts for: Rthe current vehicle position Rthe vicinity of the destination Ra winter sports area Ran area within the USA You can select a location in the information chart (option 1) or in themap (option 2). You can store frequently selected locations in the mem- ory (Y page 164).

i Themultimedia system receives data for the weather forecasts from the nearest weather station to the selected location.

162 Weather forecasts SI RI US

W ea th er

Option 1: selecting the area in the infor- mation chart X To select Position in the information chart: turn and press the controller.

X To select the current vehicle position: select Current Position from the menu. Themultimedia system receivesweather data for the current vehicle position from the near- est weather station and automatically dis- plays the data.

Requirement for "Near destination": a route to a destination has been calculated (Y page 58). The menu item is otherwise grayed out. X To select the vicinity of the destination: select Near Destination from the menu: turn the controller and press to confirm.

X To select a winter sports area: select At Ski Area from the menu: turn the controller and press to confirm.

X Select a state. X Select a winter sports area from the menu. The weather data and other information is displayed for the winter sports area that has been selected. The data is supplied by the nearest weather station.

The information chart shows the following infor- mation (if available): Rski slopes/ski lifts Rsnowboarding and nighttime opening Rsnow conditions (e.g. snow depth) Rtemperature The status of a facility is indicated as follows: Rgreen check mark - open Rred cross - closed Rquestion mark - not known

Example: city list with character bar Entry limitation: searching for a location using the character bar is not possible while driving. X To search for a location: select Search Areas: turn and press the controller.

X Select the search area, e.g. Other States(U.S.). Depending on the selection, the list of states or cities will appear with the character bar. You can limit the search using the character bar.

X To select state/province or city: enter the first few letters by turning and pressing the controller.

X To switch to the list without the character bar: slide5 the controller or select .

X To delete an entry: select 2 in the char- acter bar and press the controller. Pressing briefly deletes the last letter entered. Pressing and holding longer deletes the entire entry.

X To select the state/province or city from the list: turn and press the controller. After selecting a state (or province) the list of locations appears. After selecting a location, the information chart displays the weather forecast for the

Weather forecasts 163

SI RI US

W ea th er

selected location. The data is supplied by the nearest weather station.

Option 2: selecting the area in the weather map X Call up the weather map (Y page 164). X Move theweathermap so that the crosshair is over the desired area (Y page 164).

X Press the controller. The information chart shows the weather forecast for the selected area. The data is supplied by the nearest weather station.

Memory functions

Storing the area in theweathermemory You can save locations that are called up fre- quently in ten preset positions (0, 1-9) in the weather memory. X In the weather memory: select the area for the weather forecast (Y page 162). The selected location appears at the top in the status bar.

X To select Position in the information chart: turn and press the controller.

X Select Preset. X Select a preset using the controller. X Press and hold the controller until you hear a tone. The area is entered on the selected preset.

X To store rapidly: in the daily forecast (Y page 161) press and hold a number key, e.g.l, until the preset position number is shown in the status bar in front of the area name. i You can also use this function in the five-day forecast (Y page 161), and in the detailed information view (Y page 162).

Selecting an area from the weather memory X Directly from the weather memory: select Position from the information chart: turn and press the controller.

X Select Preset.

X Select the memory position which contains the location you require. The weather data for the selected area is dis- played.

X Quick select: if a location is stored in the weather memory, for example when the cur- rent forecast display is active, briefly press a number key, e.g.l. The weather data for the selected area is dis- played.

Weather map

Calling up the weather map

X To select Map in the information chart: turn and press the controller. The weather map is shown on a 500-mi (500- km) scale. The crosshair highlights the weather station that supplies the current weather data.

Moving the weather map X Slide4 or1 the controller. The weather mapmoves in the corresponding direction under the crosshair.

Changing the scale X Turn the controller. The scale bar appears.

X Turn until the desired scale is set.

Showing/hiding the menu in the weather map X To show: press the controller. X To hide: slide5 the controller.

164 Weather forecasts SI RI US

W ea th er

Selecting a weather station in the map X Move the weather map and crosshair to the desired position (Y page 164).

X To show the menu: press the controller. X To select Weather Table: press the control- ler. Themultimedia system receivesweather data for the selected position from the nearest weather station and displays the data as a current-day forecast.

Switching layers on the map on/off

You can switch on different layers, for example to display the rain radar, weather fronts and the course of tropical storms on the map. X Display the menu on the weather map (Y page 164).

X To select View: turn and press the controller. X Select a layer. Switch the display on O or off .

Explanation of the layers on the weather map RMenu item Radar Map Displays the precipitation radar as a color area in all map scales. For an explanation of the colors, see the legend (Y page 167). RMenu item Storm Characteristics Displays the characteristics of a storm in all map scales: - tornadic storm: storm cell with strong winds (super cell), from which a tornado can develop. Torna- does are also known as twisters.

- cyclone:

storm cells from which a tornadic storm can develop

- hailstorm - the likelihood of a hailstorm RStorm watch areas Shows areas for which storm advisories have been issued (red areas). It is shown in map scales 50 mi (50 km), 200 mi (200 km) and 500 mi (500 km). RMenu item Atmospheric Pressure Shows the position of high and low-pressure areas (H, L), weather fronts and isobars It is shown in map scales 200 mi (200 km) and 500 mi (500 km). RMenu item Tropical Storm Tracking shows the direction and speed of propagation of a tropical storm as a track in all map scales. Information on times and strength is also given. RMenu item Winds Shows the wind direction and wind speed in map scale of 5 mi (5 km).

Sample displays of weather data in the map

X To display the precipitation radar: activate the Radar Map display level (Y page 165). The precipitation radar is displayed if weather data is available.

i You can call up the legend for the precipita- tion radar (Y page 167). The transparency of the precipitation radar display level can be adjusted in five stages.

X To display the storm characteristics: acti- vate the Storm Characteristics display level (Y page 165). If weather data is available, the weather map will then display the storm characteristics.

Weather forecasts 165

SI RI US

W ea th er

You can call up the legend for storms (Y page 167). The following information on a storm cell is displayed (if available): Rcharacteristics of the storm cell Rdate and time of observation (time stamp) Rdirectional movement speed and path Propagation speed: the speed at which the storm cell is advancing.

X To display the weather fronts: activate the Atmospheric Pressure display level (Y page 165). If weather data is available, the weather map will then display the weather fronts. The example shows the position of high and low-pressure areas (H, L), weather fronts and isobars. Isobars are lines that showwhere the air pressure is the same.

Legend: weather fronts

Weather front

Explanation

Cold front (blue line with blue triangles)

If a cold front moves in, the weather remains changeable and there are often rain showers and thunderstorms. The air temperature decrea- ses.

Warm front (red line with red semi-cir- cles)

A warm front may cause more prolonged steady rain, more cloud cover and a slow rise in temperature.

Weather front

Explanation

Stationary front (red and blue line with red semi-circles and blue trian- gles)

The weather front moves minimally. The weather remains changeable in this area.

Occlusion (purple line with purple semi-circles and triangles)

When the faster cold front catches up and joins the warm front ahead of it, an occluded front is formed. The weather remains changeable and rainy within an occlu- sion.

X To display the track of a storm: activate the Tropical Storm Tracking display level (Y page 165). If weather data is available, the weather map will then display storm tracking information. Example: in themiddle of themap you can see the current position of the tropical low-pres- sure area (cyclone). To the right of this a solid line shows the previous path with positions and times. The forecast for the direction of propagation is shown by a dotted line with positions and times.

166 Weather forecasts SI RI US

W ea th er

You can find out more information about cyclo- nes in the Storm Guide (Y page 168). The following information is shown (if available): Rname of the tropical storm and category Rtime stamp Rdirectional movement speed and path Rmaximum wind speed Propagation speed: the speed at which the storm cell of a tropical cyclone is advancing. A tropical storm is categorized according to where it originated.

Region of origin category

Atlantic, North and South Pacific Oceans

Name of tropical low- pressure system (Tropical Low Press.Sys.)

Atlantic, North and South Pacific Oceans

Name of tropical storm(Tropical Storm)

Atlantic, North and South Pacific Oceans

Name of tropical storm(Hurricane Category3) Displays hurricane cate- gories 1 through 5

Northwestern Pacific Ocean

Name of tropical storm(Tropical LowPress. Sys.) Northwestern Pacific Ocean

Name of tropical storm(Tropical Cyclone) Northwestern Pacific Ocean

Name of tropical storm(Typhoon) Northwestern Pacific Ocean

Name of tropical storm(Super-Typhoon) You can also see the time stamp for the weather data on map scales of 50 miles and smaller. The weather map shows wind directions and wind speeds.

Legend (precipitation radar and storms)

X Display the menu on the weather map (Y page 164).

X To select View: turn and press the controller. X Select Legend. i The symbol for a tornadic storm is also valid for a cyclone (mesocyclone).

Precipita- tion type

Color scale

Rain Eleven shades from light to heavy (light green to red)

Mixed Shades from light to heavy (light purple to purple)

Snow Shades from light to heavy (light turquoise to turquoise)

Time stamp The time stamp shows when the weather data was created by the weather station. A time stamp corresponds to the time at the vehicle's current position. The changeover from summer time to standard time is performed automatically. X Display the menu on the weather map (Y page 164).

X To select View: turn and press the controller. X Select Time Stamp. Changing to the information chart X Display the menu on the weather map (Y page 164).

X To select Weather Table: turn and press the controller.

Weather forecasts 167

SI RI US

W ea th er

Storm Watch Box

Storm watch areas for which there are storm advisories are displayed as red areas on the weather map. X To activate/deactivate the storm watch area display on the map: display the menu on the weather map (Y page 164).

X To select View: turn and press the controller. The list of display levels appears.

X Select Storm Watch. X Select Show Sym. for Storm Areas onMap. Storm watch areas are displayed O or are not displayed on the map.

X To activate/deactivate the automatic dis- play of storm advisories: select Display Storm Watch Automatically. Storm advisories are automatically displayed O or not displayed on the map.

X To set the radius for storm advisories: select 5 Miles, 50 Miles or 200 Miles.

Storm Guide

X To display the storm guide: display the menu on the weather map (Y page 164).

X To select Guide: turn and press the controller. A menu appears. The current storm is high- lighted. There is information about the storm in the status bar.

X To select Next: turn and press the controller. The next storm is marked.

X Select Previous. The previous storm is highlighted.

X To display storm details: select Details. You see detailed information about the selec- ted storm.

168 Weather forecasts SI RI US

W ea th er

Your multimedia system equipment

These operating instructions describe all the standard and optional equipment of your multi- media system, as available at the time of going to press. Country-specific differences are pos- sible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not feature all functions described here. This also applies to safety-relevant systems and func- tions. Read the information on qualified specialist workshops in the vehicle Operator's Manual.

Overview

Important safety notes

G WARNING The CD/DVD drive is a class 1 laser product. If you open the housing of the CD/DVD drive, there is a risk of exposure to invisible laser radiation. This laser radiation could damage your retina. There is a risk of injury. Never open the housing. Always have main- tenance and repair work carried out at a quali- fied specialist workshop.

G WARNING If objects such as headphones/headsets or external audio/video sources are not secured in the passenger compartment, they can be flung around and hit vehicle occupants. There

is a risk of injury, for example in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direc- tion. Always stow these items or similar objects carefully so that they cannot be flung around, for example in a lockable vehicle stowage compartment.

Equipment Observe that a range of Rear Seat Entertain- ment Systems are available for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. In this Operator's Manual, the Rear Seat Entertainment System Code 864 is used for illustration purposes. If you have a different Rear Seat Entertainment System in your vehicle, please refer to the manufacturer's operating instructions.

Components The Rear Seat Entertainment System includes: Rtwo screens for the rear behind the front-seat head restraints Rtwo remote controls Ra single drive (rear-compartment drive) RAUX jacks on both rear screens (AUX display) RAUX jacks on the rear drive (AUX drive) Rheadphones for each rear screen Rtwo sets of cordless headphones

Rear-compartment screens

: AUX jacks (AUX display) ; Display

Overview 169

Re ar Se at En te rt ai nm

en tS

ys te m

Z

The same AUX jacks (AUX drive) can be found in the rear-compartment drive (Y page 171).

Remote control

Overview

: Switches the screen on or off ; Switches the button illumination on/off = Selects the screen for the remote control ? Selects a menu item A Confirms a selection or setting B Switches the mute function on/off C Adjusts the volume D Skips, fast-forward and fast-rewind E Selects a track; direct entry F Exits a menu (back)

i Two remote controls are supplied for the US and Canadian markets.

Selecting the screen for the remote con- trol You can use the remote control to operate either of the two rear screens. To do so, the appropri- ate rear screen must be selected. X To select the left-hand screen: turn thumb- wheel= until L REAR (Y page 170) is high- lighted in the window.

X To select the right-hand screen: turn thumbwheel= until REAR R is highlighted in the window.

Switching the screen on/off The switched-on rear compartment screens switch off after 30 minutes if: Rthe SmartKey in the ignition lock is in position u or1 (see the vehicle Operator's Manual) Rthe SmartKey is not inserted Before the screens switch off, they show a mes- sage to this effect. You can switch the screens back on. However, this will discharge the starter battery. X Point the remote control at the rear-compart- ment screen which has been selected for remote operation.

X Press button: on the remote control (Y page 170). The rear screen switches on or off.

Switching the button lighting on/off X Press button; on the remote control (Y page 170). Depending on the previous status, the button lighting is switched on or off.

i If you do not use the remote control for about 15 seconds, the button lighting switches off automatically.

Switching the sound on or off X Press buttonB on the remote control (Y page 170). The sound is switched on/off.

Selecting a menu/menu item and con- firming your selection X Select a menu item using the=; 9: buttons on the remote control and press the 9 button to confirm.

170 Overview Re ar

Se at En te rt ai nm

en tS

ys te m

CD/DVD drive and AUX jacks

: Disc slot ; AUX, right-hand (R) jack for audio signal

(red)

= AUX, left-hand (L) jack for audio signal (white)

? AUX, video (V) jack (yellow) A Disc eject button The AUX jacks shown are for the AUX drive. Identical jacks can be found on the right-hand side of the rear-compartment screens (AUX dis- play) (Y page 169).

Cordless headphones

Overview

X To adjust the headphones: open both sides of the headphones. X Adjust the headphones by pulling the headphone band in the direction of the arrow. X To switch the headphones on or off: press On or Off switch;. X To adjust the volume: turn volume control= until the desired volume is set. If you have con- nected corded headphones to a rear-compartment screen, you can adjust the volume using the remote control (Y page 170).

X To check the battery condition of charge: check the state of the batteries using indicator lamp: (Y page 172).

The headphones automatically switch off if they have not received an audio signal for approximately three minutes. This preserves the batteries.

Overview 171

Re ar

Se at En te rt ai nm

en tS

ys te m

Z

Indicator lamp on the cordless head- phones The color of the indicator lamp shows: Rwhether the device is switched on or off Rthe condition of the inserted batteries

LED dis- play

Status

Green The batteries are fine.

Red The batteries are almost dis- charged.

Lit continu- ously

The headphones are switched on and connected to a screen.

Flashing The headphones are searching for the connection to a screen.

No display (dark)

The headphones are switched off or the batteries are dis- charged.

The function of the headphones may be impaired by other radio-based electronic devi- ces such as mobile phones or laptops.

Selecting the screen for the cordless headphones

X Slide switch: to L (left-hand screen) or R (right-hand screen).

Connecting additional headphones Up to two cordless headphones can be used at the same time for each screen. You can also connect one additional set of cor- ded headphones to each of the two rear-com- partment screens (Y page 169). The socket is designed for headphones with a 3.5 mm stereo jack plug and an impedance of 32 ohms.

Replacing batteries

Notes

G WARNING Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substan- ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal injury. Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If a battery is swallowed, seekmedical attention immediately.

H Environmental note Batteries contain dangerous substances. It is against the law to dispose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected separately and recycled to protect the environment. Dispose of batteries in an environmentally friendly manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified spe- cialist workshop or a special collection point for used bat- teries.

Batteries are required for the remote control and for the two sets of cordless headphones. X Switch to the remote control (Y page 173). X Switch to cordless headphones (Y page 173).

172 Overview Re ar Se at En te rt ai nm

en tS

ys te m

On the remote control

: Battery compartment ; Catch tab = Battery compartment cover ? Retaining lugs A Batteries The remote control contains two type AAA, 1.5 V batteries. X To open the battery compartment: remove battery compartment cover= on the back of the remote control.

X To do so, press down retaining lug; and take off battery compartment cover=.

X Remove discharged batteriesA from the tray.

X Insert the new batteries. Observe the polarity markings on the batteries and battery com- partment when doing so. Left-hand battery: the positive pole (+) must face upwards. Right-hand battery: the positive pole (+) must face downwards.

X To close the battery compartment: insert battery compartment cover= starting with retaining lugs? into the battery compart- ment and allow catch tab; to engage in place.

On the cordless headphones

The battery compartment is located on the left headphone. The cordless headphones require two type AAA, 1.5 V batteries. X To open the battery compartment: turn battery compartment cover: counter- clockwise and remove.

X Remove the discharged batteries from the tray.

X Insert the new batteries. Observe the polarity markings on the batteries and battery tray when doing so.

X To close the battery compartment: replace battery housing cover: and turn it clock- wise until it engages. If the batteries have been inserted correctly, the indicator lampwill light up greenwhen the headphones are switched on.

i The operating duration of the headphones with a set of batteries is up to 40 hours.

Basic functions

Using headphones You can use the cordless headphones supplied and/or up to two sets of corded headphones connected to the corresponding jack of the rear- compartment screens (Y page 169). Information on the cordless headphones (Y page 171).

Basic functions 173

Re ar

Se at En te rt ai nm

en tS

ys te m

Z

Using the main loudspeakers This function is available in conjunction with the multimedia system. You can use the vehicle loudspeakers to listen to a disc inserted in the rear-compartment drive. To do so, disc mode (audio CD/audio DVD/ MP3) must be activated on at least one rear screen. The volume setting of the headphones does not affect the main loudspeakers. X To set on themultimedia system: press the

$ button, for example, to switch on an audio mode.

X To select Information6 slide and press the controller. A menu appears.

X Turn the controller until Rear Seat Entertainment System: Audio is brought to the front.

X Press the controller.

Selecting sound settings You can select sound settings in the following operating modes: RAudio CD/MP3 RVideo DVD RRadio (active media source in COMAND) RAUX X Switch on an operating mode (e.g. CD mode) (Y page 175).

X Select Treble or Bass using the:=; buttons on the remote control and press the 9 button to confirm. An adjustment scale appears.

X Select a setting using the9: buttons and press the 9 button to confirm.

Multiple users

Simultaneous use of the rear-compart- ment disc drive The two rear-compartment screens can be oper- ated almost entirely independently from one another. However, a conflict may occur in some menus if the two screens are used simultane- ously.

The following functions affect both screens: Rchanging playback options Rselecting a track (from a track list or folder) Rusing the play, pause and stop functions Rfast forward and rewind or scrolling Rcalling up the DVD menu and navigating within it Rsetting the language, subtitles and camera angle Rcalling up interactive DVD content The following functions affect only one screen: Rfunctions in audio and video mode Rchanging picture settings Rswitching between full screen and the menu

Switching between operating modes When you exit an operating mode (e.g. CD mode), the current setting is saved. If you call up this operating mode again later, there are two possibilities: Rthe operating mode has been changed on the other screen. Rthe operating mode has not been changed. In the first case, the operating mode appears as it is on the other screen. In the second case, the setting appears on the screen as it was when you last exited the oper- ating mode.

Picture settings

Overview You can select the picture settings in DVD and AUX mode (Y page 184).

Adjusting the brightness, contrast and color X Switch to DVD mode (Y page 179). X To show the menu: press the 9 button on the remote control.

174 Basic functions Re ar

Se at En te rt ai nm

en tS

ys te m

X Select DVD-Video using the:=; buttons and press the 9 button to confirm.

X Select Brightness, Contrast or Color using the9: buttons and press the9 button to confirm. A scale appears.

X Select a setting using the9: buttons and press the 9 button to confirm.

Changing the picture format X To show the menu: press the 9 button on the remote control.

X Select DVD-Video using the:=; buttons and press the 9 button to confirm. The dot in front of one of the menu items16:9, 4:3 or Zoom shows the currently set picture format.

X Select a format using the9: buttons and press the 9 button to confirm.

System settings

Note You can adjust all system settings individually for each rear screen without affecting the other screen.

Selecting the display language X Select System using the9=; but- tons on the remote control and press 9 to confirm. You see the systemmenu on the selected rear screen.

X Select Settings using the: button and press 9 to confirm.

X Press the 9 button to confirm Language. The list of languages appears. The # dot indi- cates the current setting.

X Select a language using the9: but- tons and press the 9 button to confirm. The Rear Seat Entertainment System sets the selected language.

Switching the display design X Select Settings using the: button and press 9 to confirm.

X Select Day Mode, Night Mode or Automatic with the9: buttons and confirm with the 9 button. The dot indicates the current setting.

Design Explanation

Day Mode The display is set perma- nently to day design.

Night Mode The display is set perma- nently to night design.

Automatic The display design changes depending on the vehicle instrument cluster illumination.

Setting the brightness X Select Settings using the: button and press 9 to confirm.

X Select Brightness with the9: but- tons and confirm with the 9 button. A scale appears.

X Adjust the brightness using the9: buttons and press the 9 button to confirm. The bar moves up or down. The picture becomes lighter or darker.

Showing/hiding the picture X To hide the picture: select Display in the systemmenu using the:; buttons on the remote control and press the9 button to confirm. The picture is hidden.

X To display the picture: press the 9 button.

Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode

Important safety notes

G WARNING The CD/DVD drive is a class 1 laser product. If you open the housing of the CD/DVD drive, there is a risk of exposure to invisible laser

Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode 175

Re ar

Se at En te rt ai nm

en tS

ys te m

Z

radiation. This laser radiation could damage your retina. There is a risk of injury. Never open the housing. Always have main- tenance and repair work carried out at a quali- fied specialist workshop.

General notes The rear-compartment drive is a single disc drive. Notes on audio mode can be found in the "Media" section (Y page 137): RNotes on CDs and DVDs RNotes on MP3 mode RNotes on copyright

Inserting and removing a CD/DVD from the rear-compartment drive

: Disc slot ; Disc eject button The rear-compartment drive is located behind the center console in a folding compartment. Depending on the vehicle equipment level, the rear-compartment drive is located: Runder the rear bench seat or Rin the center console between the driver's and front-passenger seats

If there is already a disc inserted, this must be ejected before another is inserted. X To remove: press the button. The rear-compartment drive ejects the disc.

X To insert: insert a disc into the disc slot with the printed side facing upwards. The rear-compartment drive closes and the disc is played.

The rear-compartment drive plays the disc: Rif it has been inserted correctly and is a permissible disc, and Rafter you have switched on disc mode (audio CD or audio DVD or MP3 mode) (Y page 176).

Data on anMP3CD first needs to be loaded by the drive. Loading may take some time, depending on the number of folders and tracks.

Switching to audio CD, audio DVD or MP3 mode

: Calls up CD functions, other displays: MP3 (MP3 mode), DVD-A (audio DVD mode)

; Calls up track list (audio CD and audio DVD mode), calls up folders (MP3 mode)

= Sets the treble ? Sets the bass The example shows audio CD mode. The num- ber and the elapsed playback time for the cur- rent track are displayed. X Insert a CD or DVD (Y page 176). The Rear Seat Entertainment System loads the inserted disc and plays it.

X If the Rear Seat Entertainment System does not play back the disc automatically, selectDisc using the9=; buttons on the remote control and confirm with the 9 button. The corresponding mode is switched on. The Rear Seat Entertainment System plays the disc.

i Variable bit rates in MP3 tracks can result in the elapsed time shown being different from the actual elapsed time.

176 Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode Re ar

Se at En te rt ai nm

en tS

ys te m

Selecting a track

Via skip function X Press the= or; button on the remote control.

or X Press theE orF button. The skip forward function skips to the next track. If the elapsed track time has passed 8 sec- onds, the function skips back to the beginning of the track. If the elapsed time is shorter, it will skip to the start of the previous track. If the Random Tracks or Random Folder playback option has been selected, the track order is random.

Via track list In audio CD mode, the track list contains all tracks on the disc currently playing. In audio DVD mode, the track list contains all tracks in the currently active group. In MP3 mode, the track list shows all tracks in the currently active folder as well as the folder structure, allowing you to select any track on the MP3 CD. X Select Tracks (audio CD/DVD mode) orFolder (MP3 mode) using the:=; buttons on the remote control, and confirm by pressing the 9 but- ton.

or X Press the 9 button when the selection win- dow is active. The track list appears. The# dot indicates the current track.

X Select a track using the9: buttons and press the 9 button to confirm.

By entering the track number directly X Press theh button on the remote control. The track entry display appears.

Example: track 2 X Press the button.

Example: track 23 X Press the and buttons in quick succession.

X Wait for approximately three seconds after making the entry. You will hear the track which has been entered. The corresponding basic menu then reappears. i It is not possible to enter numbers that exceed the number of tracks on the CD or in the currently active folder.

Fast forwarding/rewinding X With the selection window active, press the = or; button on the remote control repeatedly until you reach the desired posi- tion.

or X Press and hold theE orF button until the desired position has been reached.

Selecting a folder This function is available in MP3 mode. X Select Folder in MP3 mode using the:=; buttons on the remote control and press the 9 button to confirm.

or X Press the 9 button when the selection win- dow is active. The folder content appears.

X To switch to the superordinate folder: select symbolU using the9: but- tons on the remote control and press the 9 button to confirm. The display shows the next folder up.

X To select a folder: select a folder by pressing the9: button and confirmby pressing the 9 button. You will see the tracks in the folder.

X Select a track using the9: buttons and press the 9 button to confirm. The track is played and the selected folder is now the active folder.

Pause function This function is available in audio DVD mode.

Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode 177

Re ar

Se at En te rt ai nm

en tS

ys te m

Z

X To pause playback: press the 9 button in full-screen mode. The display changes to.

X Select using the:=; but- tons on the remote control and confirm with the 9 button. The display changes to.

X To continue playback: select and press the 9 button to confirm. The display changes to.

Stop function This function is available in audio DVD mode. X To interrupt playback: press the 9 button in full-screen mode.

X Select using the:=; but- tons on the remote control and confirm with the 9 button. The display changes to.

X To continue playback: select and press the 9 button to confirm. Playback continues from the point where it was interrupted.

X To stop playback: while playback is inter- rupted, select again and press the 9 button to confirm. Playback stops and returns to the beginning of the DVD. is highlighted.

X To restart playback: select and press the 9 button to confirm. Playback starts from the beginning of the DVD.

Setting the audio format The content of an audio DVD can be divided into up to 9 groups. The availability and type of group depends on the respective DVD. A group can contain music of different sound qualities (stereo and multichannel formats, for example), or bonus tracks. X In full-screen mode press the 9 button. X Select DVD-A using the:=; but- tons on the remote control and press 9 to confirm.

X Select Group using the9: buttons and press the 9 button to confirm. The list of available audio formats appears. The # dot indicates the format currently selected.

X Select an audio format using the9: buttons and press the 9 button to confirm.

X To exit the menu: press the= or; button.

Playback options X Select CD, DVD-A or MP3 using the:=; buttons on the remote control and press the 9 button to confirm. A list appears. The # dot indicates the play- back option currently selected.

X Select Normal Track Sequence, RandomTracks or Random Folder using the 9: buttons and press the9 button to confirm. The option is switched on. For all options except Normal Track Sequence, you will see a corresponding display in the selection window. i If you switch the data carrier which you are currently listening to, the Normal TrackSequence option is activated automatically. If an option is selected, it remains selected after the Rear Seat Entertainment System is switched on or off.

Switching track information on/off (MP3 mode only) If the function is switched on, folder and track names are displayed. If the function is switched off, disc and file names are displayed. X Select MP3 using the:=; buttons on the remote control and press the9button to confirm.

X Select Display Track Information using the9: buttons and press the 9 but- ton to confirm. The function is switched on O or off , depending on the previous status.

178 Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode Re ar

Se at En te rt ai nm

en tS

ys te m

Video DVD mode

Important safety notes

G WARNING The CD/DVD drive is a class 1 laser product. If you open the housing of the CD/DVD drive, there is a risk of exposure to invisible laser radiation. This laser radiation could damage your retina. There is a risk of injury. Never open the housing. Always have main- tenance and repair work carried out at a quali- fied specialist workshop.

General notes

DVD playback conditions Playback problems may occur when playing copied discs. There is a large variety of discs, DVD authoring software, writing software and writers available. This variety means that there is no guarantee that the Rear Seat Entertain- ment Systemwill be able to playDVDvideos that you have copied yourself. Further information (Y page 152). Information regarding the multimedia system also applies to the Rear Seat Entertainment System.

Function restrictions Depending on theDVD, it is possible that certain functions or actions described in this section will be temporarily blocked or may not function at all. As soon as you try to activate these func- tions or actions, you will see theK symbol in the display.

Switching on video DVD mode X Insert a video DVD (Y page 176). The Rear Seat Entertainment System loads the disc. If discmodewas the lastmode selected, it will now be active.

If it was not, switch on video DVD mode as described in the following instructions.

X Select Disc in the menu using the 9=; buttons on the remote con- trol and confirm by pressing the 9 button. If the DVD video fulfills the playback criteria, the film either starts automatically or the menu saved on the DVD appears. If the DVD menu appears, you must start the film man- ually.

X Select the corresponding menu item in the DVD menu. A submenu is displayed. If available, addi- tional options can now be selected.

Showing/hiding the control menu

: Type of data medium ; Current title = Current scene ? Track time A Displays the menu X To show: press the9 or: button on the remote control.

X To hide: press the9 or: button. or X Wait about eight seconds.

Video DVD mode 179

Re ar

Se at En te rt ai nm

en tS

ys te m

Z

Showing/hiding the menu

: Video DVD options ; Pause function = Stop function ? Sets the treble A Sets the bass X To show: press the 9 button on the remote control.

X To hide: press the9 button and confirm # by pressing the 9 button.

Fast forwarding/rewinding X Press and hold theE orF button on the remote control until the desired position has been reached. You see the control menu.

Pause function X To show the menu: press the 9 button on the remote control.

X To pause playback: select and press the 9 button to confirm. The display changes to.

X To continue playback: select and press the 9 button to confirm. The menu is hidden.

Stop function X To show the menu: press the 9 button on the remote control.

X To interrupt playback: select and press the 9 button to confirm. The display changes to. The video image is hidden.

X To continue playback: select and press the 9 button to confirm. Playback continues from the point where it was interrupted. The menu is hidden.

X To stop playback: while playback is inter- rupted, select again and press the 9 button to confirm. Playback stops and returns to the beginning of the DVD. is highlighted.

X To restart playback: select and press the 9 button to confirm. Playback starts from the beginning of the DVD.

Selecting a scene/chapter

Skipping forward/back X Press the= or; button on the remote control.

or X Press theE orF button. The navigation menu (Y page 179) appears for approximately eight seconds.

Selecting a scene/chapter directly The examples illustrate how to select scene or chapter 5. X Option 1: while the film is playing, press the h button on the remote control.

X Press a button, such as. X Option 2: press the 9 button on the remote control.

X Select DVD-Video and press the 9 button to confirm.

X Select DVD Functions and press the 9 but- ton to confirm.

X Select Scene Selection and press the 9 button to confirm.

X Select 5 using the9 or: button and press the 9 button to confirm. In both cases, playbackwill begin from the5th scene or chapter after a brief pause.

180 Video DVD mode Re ar

Se at En te rt ai nm

en tS

ys te m

Selecting a film/track X Option 1: press the 9 button on the remote control.

X Select DVD-Video and press the 9 button to confirm.

X Select DVD functions and press the 9 but- ton to confirm.

X Select Title selection and press the 9 button to confirm.

X Press the 9 button to select the list. X Select a film or a title. X Option 2: to select film 2, for example, press the button on the remote control. After a brief pause, the second film is played.

DVD menu

Calling up the DVD menu The DVD menu is the menu stored on the DVD itself. It is structured in various ways according to the individual DVD and permits various actions and settings. In the case ofmulti-languageDVDs, for example, you can change the DVD language in the DVD menu. X To show the menu: press the 9 button on the remote control.

X Select DVD-Video and press the9 button on the remote control to confirm.

X Select DVD Functions and press the 9 but- ton to confirm.

X Select Menu and press the 9 button to con- firm. The DVD menu appears.

Selecting menu items in the DVD menu X Select a menu item using the 9:=; buttons on the remote control and press the 9 button to confirm. A menu appears.

X Confirm Select by pressing the 9 button. A submenu is displayed.

X If available, additional options can now be selected. The Rear Seat Entertainment System then switches back to the DVD menu.

i Menu items which cannot be selected are shown in gray.

i Depending on the DVD, the menu itemsBack (to movie), Play, Stop,E,F or Go Upmay not function at all or not at cer- tain points in the DVD menu. To indicate this, theK symbol appears in the display.

Stopping a film or skipping to the begin- ning or end of a scene X Select any menu item from the DVD menu. The menu appears.

X To stop the film: select the Stop menu item andpress the9button on the remote control to confirm.

X To skip to the end of a scene: select the F menu item and press the 9 button to confirm.

X To skip to the beginning of a scene: select theEmenu item and press the 9 button to confirm.

Moving up one level in the DVD menu X Call up the DVD menu. X Press the% back button on the remote control or select the corresponding menu item in the DVD menu.

or X Select any menu item in the DVD menu and press the 9 remote control button to con- firm.

X Select Go Up and pressW to confirm.

Back to the movie X Press the% back button repeatedly until you see the film.

or X Select any menu item in the DVD menu and press the 9 remote control button to con- firm.

X Select the Back (to movie) menu item in the menu and press the 9 button to confirm.

Setting the audio format You can use this function to set the audio lan- guage or the audio format. The number of set-

Video DVD mode 181

Re ar

Se at En te rt ai nm

en tS

ys te m

Z

tings is determined by the DVD content. It may also be possible to access the settings from the DVD menu. This function is not available on all DVDs. X To show the menu: press the 9 button on the remote control.

X Select DVD-Video and press the9 button on the remote control to confirm.

X Select DVD Functions and press the 9 but- ton to confirm.

X Select Audio Language and press the 9 button to confirm. Amenu appears after a short while. The# dot indicates the currently set language.

X Select a language using the9: but- tons and press the 9 button to confirm.

Subtitles and camera angle These functions are not available on all DVDs. The number of subtitle languages and camera angles available depends on the content of the DVD. It may also be possible to access the set- tings from the DVD menu. X To show the menu: press the 9 button on the remote control.

X Select DVD-Video and press the9 button on the remote control to confirm.

X Select DVD Functions and press the 9 but- ton to confirm.

X Select Subtitles or Camera Angle and press the 9 button to confirm. In both cases, a menu appears after a few seconds. The # dot indicates the current set- ting.

X Select a setting using the9: buttons and press the 9 button to confirm.

Interactive content DVDs can also contain interactive content (e.g. a video game). In a video game, you may be able to influence events, for example, by selecting and triggering actions. The type and number of actions depend on the DVD.

X Select an action using the 9;:= buttons on the remote control and press the 9 button to execute it. Amenu appears and the first entry, Select, is highlighted.

X Press the 9 button.

Active COMAND media source mode

Overview You can transfer a media source selected in the multimedia system to the Rear Seat Entertain- ment System. If you switch the media source in the multimedia system, this will not be transfer- red to the Rear Seat Entertainment System. You can transfer these media sources to the Rear Seat Entertainment System: RRadio RCD or MP3 mode (CD, SD card, USB) RMedia Interface RVideo DVD mode Follow the sequence described below when playing a media source from the multimedia system on the Rear Seat Entertainment System.

1. Switching on the function in the multimedia system X Switch on the radio (Y page 128). X Switch CD or MP3 mode on (CD, SD card, USB) (Y page 136).

X Switch on the media interface (Y page 150). X Switch to video DVD mode (Y page 152).

182 Active COMAND media source mode Re ar

Se at En te rt ai nm

en tS

ys te m

2. Transferring the active media source to the Rear Seat Entertain- ment System

X To select the Options menu, turn and press the controller.

X Select Active Aud./Vid. Source forRear by pressing the controller. The # dot indicates that the function is acti- vated.

X To switch off the function: select Rear Off (Radio) or Rear Off (Media). The # dot indicates that the function is deac- tivated.

3. Loading the active media source to the Rear Seat Entertainment System X Select COMAND using the9=; but- tons on the remote control and press 9 to confirm. A message appears stating that the desired audio or video source needs to be activated in the multimedia system. If the media source is activated in the multimedia system, it is loa- ded on the Rear Seat Entertainment System and is then played.

If Rear Off is activated in the multimedia sys- tem, the COMAND is off or there is noactive COMAND source. message appears.

Radio mode functions

X To select a station: press the= or; button.

or X Press theE orF button. The radio selects the previous or next station in the alphabetical station list. DAB stations are displayed first, followed by stations with available station names. Sta- tions showing station frequency are shown last.

Additional setting option: X Adjust the sound settings (Y page 174).

Functions in CD mode X To select by skipping to a track: press the = or; button.

or X Press theE orF button. The skip forward function skips to the next track. If more than 8 seconds of track time have elapsed, the function skips back to the begin- ning of the track. If less than 8 seconds of track time have elapsed, the function skips back to the begin- ning of the previous track.

Additional setting option: X Adjust the sound settings (Y page 174).

Audio DVD mode functions X To skip to the next or previous group: press the: button on the remote control.

X To selectKL, highlight using the= or; button and press 9.

Active COMAND media source mode 183

Re ar

Se at En te rt ai nm

en tS

ys te m

Z

Additional setting option: X Adjust the sound settings (Y page 174).

MP3 mode functions X To select a track by skipping to a track: press the= or; button on the remote control.

or X Press theE orF button. The skip forward function skips to the next track. If the elapsed track time has exceeded 8 sec- onds, the function skips back to the beginning of the track. If the elapsed track time is less than 8 sec- onds, the function skips back to the beginning of the previous track.

Additional setting option: X Adjust the sound settings (Y page 174).

DVD video mode functions Hiding the menu: X Press the9 or: button on the remote control.

or X Wait about eight seconds. The menu is hidden.

Additional setting options: X Adjust the brightness, contrast and color (Y page 174).

X Change the picture format (Y page 175). X Adjust the sound settings (Y page 174).

AUX mode

Introduction You can connect external video sources with a sound and video signal to the Rear Seat Enter- tainment System: Rone external video source to each of the rear screens (AUX display) Rone external video source to the rear-com- partment disc drive (AUX drive)

Operating the external video source; see the manufacturer's operating instructions. For further details about external video sources, please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Connecting AUX equipment

AUX drive jacks The AUX drive jacks are located on the rear- compartment drive to the right of the (Y page 171) button.

AUX display jacks The AUX display jacks are on the side of the two rear screens (Y page 169).

Connecting audio and video cables X Insert the audio plugs for the left and right signals into the corresponding L and R jacks.

X Insert the video plug into the V jack.

Activating AUX mode

AUX drive Requirements: the external video source is con- nected to the rear-compartment drive and play- back is selected. X Select Aux in the menu using the 9=; buttons on the remote con- trol and press the 9 button to confirm. The AUX menu appears.

X Select Source from the AUX menu and press the 9 button to confirm.

X Select Disc drive Aux and press the 9 button to confirm. Playback starts. If an external video source does not provide a video picture, an audio menu appears.

Displaying AUX Requirements: the external video source is con- nected to the rear-compartment screen and playback is selected. X Select a screen using the thumbwheel on the remote control (Y page 170) until "L REAR"

184 AUX mode Re ar

Se at En te rt ai nm

en tS

ys te m

(left-hand screen) or "R REAR" (right-hand screen) is highlighted in the window.

X Select Aux in the menu using the 9=; buttons on the remote con- trol and press the 9 button to confirm.

X Select Source from the AUX menu and press the 9 button to confirm.

X Select Display Aux and press the 9 button to confirm. Playback starts. If an external video source does not provide a video picture, an audio menu appears.

Adjusting treble and bass X Select Treble or Bass in the AUX menu and press the 9 button on the remote control to confirm. A scale appears.

X Select a setting using the9 or: but- ton and press the 9 button to confirm.

Adjusting the brightness, contrast or color X Select Display Aux or Disc drive Aux in the AUX menu and press the 9 button to confirm.

X Select Brightness, Contrast or Color and press the 9 button to confirm. A scale appears.

X Select a setting using the9 or: but- ton and press the 9 button to confirm.

Changing the picture format X Select Display Aux or Disc drive Aux in the AUX menu and press the 9 button to confirm.

X Select Automatic, 16:9 optimize, 4:3 orZoom using the9: buttons and press the 9 button to confirm. The dot in front of themenu item indicates the currently selected picture format.

AUX mode 185

Re ar

Se at En te rt ai nm

en tS

ys te m</

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the Coupe Mercedes-Benz works, you can view and download the Mercedes-Benz GLE Coupe 2018 Command Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Command Manual for Mercedes-Benz Coupe as well as other Mercedes-Benz manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Command Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Mercedes-Benz Coupe. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Mercedes-Benz GLE Coupe 2018 Command Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Mercedes-Benz GLE Coupe 2018 Command Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Mercedes-Benz GLE Coupe 2018 Command Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Mercedes-Benz GLE Coupe 2018 Command Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Mercedes-Benz GLE Coupe 2018 Command Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.